ST72324BK2T7/XXX [STMICROELECTRONICS]

8-BIT, MROM, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP32, 7 X 7 MM, PLASTIC, TQFP-32;
ST72324BK2T7/XXX
型号: ST72324BK2T7/XXX
厂家: ST    ST
描述:

8-BIT, MROM, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP32, 7 X 7 MM, PLASTIC, TQFP-32

时钟 微控制器 外围集成电路
文件: 总140页 (文件大小:1386K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
ST72323  
3V/5V RANGE 8-BIT MCU WITH 4/8K ROM,  
10-BIT ADC, 4 TIMERS, SPI  
PRELIMINARY DATA  
Memories  
– 4/8K ROM with read-out protection capability  
– 384 bytes RAM  
– Compatible with Flash superset ST72F324B  
Clock, Reset And Supply Management  
LQFP44  
10 x 10  
LQFP48  
7 x 7  
LQFP32  
7 x 7  
– Clock sources: crystal/ceramic resonator os-  
cillators, internal RC oscillator and bypass for  
external clock  
– Four Power Saving Modes: Halt, Active-Halt,  
Wait and Slow  
Interrupt Management  
– Nested interrupt controller  
SO34  
SDIP32  
400 mil  
– 10 interrupt vectors plus TRAP and RESET  
– 9/6 external interrupt lines (on 4 vectors)  
Up to 32 I/O Ports  
– 32/24 multifunctional bidirectional I/O lines  
– 22/17 alternate function lines  
– 12/10 high sink outputs  
Communications Interface  
– SPI synchronous serial interface  
1 Analog Peripheral (low current coupling)  
4 Timers  
– Main Clock Controller with: Real time base,  
– 10-bit ADC with up to 12 robust input ports  
Beep and Clock-out capabilities  
– Configurable watchdog timer  
Instruction Set  
– 16-bit Timer A with: 1 input capture, 1 output  
compare, external clock input, PWM and  
pulse generator modes  
– 8-bit Data Manipulation  
– 63 Basic Instructions  
– 17 main Addressing Modes  
– 8 x 8 Unsigned Multiply Instruction  
– 16-bit Timer B with: 2 input captures, 2 output  
compares, PWM and pulse generator modes  
Development Tools  
– Full hardware/software development package  
– In-Circuit Testing capability  
Device Summary  
Features  
Program memory - bytes  
RAM (stack) - bytes  
Voltage Range  
ST72323Lx1  
ROM 4K  
ST72323Lx2  
ROM 8K  
ST72323x1  
ROM 4K  
ST72323x2  
ROM 8K  
384 (256)  
2.85V to 3.6V  
up to -40°C to +85°C  
LQFP48 7x7 , LQFP44 10x10 , SO34, LQFP32 7x7, SDIP32  
384 (256)  
3.8V to 5.5V  
up to -40°C to +125°C  
Temp. Range  
Packages  
Rev. 1  
1/140  
April 2006  
This is preliminary information on a new product now in development or undergoing evaluation. Details are subject to change without notice.  
1
Table of Contents  
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
2 PIN DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
3 REGISTER & MEMORY MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
4 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
4.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
4.2 MAIN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
4.3 CPU REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
5 SUPPLY, RESET AND CLOCK MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
5.1 MULTI-OSCILLATOR (MO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
5.2 RESET SEQUENCE MANAGER (RSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
5.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
5.2.2 Asynchronous External RESET pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
5.2.3 External Power-On RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
5.2.4 Internal Watchdog RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
6 INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
6.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
6.2 MASKING AND PROCESSING FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
6.3 INTERRUPTS AND LOW POWER MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
6.4 CONCURRENT & NESTED MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
6.5 INTERRUPT REGISTER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
6.6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
6.6.1 I/O Port Interrupt Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
6.7 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER (EICR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
7 POWER SAVING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
7.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
7.2 SLOW MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
7.3 WAIT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
7.4 ACTIVE-HALT AND HALT MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
7.4.1 ACTIVE-HALT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
7.4.2 HALT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
8 I/O PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
8.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
8.2.1 Input Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
8.2.2 Output Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
8.2.3 Alternate Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
8.3 I/O PORT IMPLEMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
8.4 LOW POWER MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
8.5 INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
8.5.1 I/O Port Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
9 ON-CHIP PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
9.1 WATCHDOG TIMER (WDG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
9.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
9.1.2 Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
2/140  
2
Table of Contents  
9.1.3 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
9.1.4 How to Program the Watchdog Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
9.1.5 Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
9.1.6 Hardware Watchdog Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
9.1.7 Using Halt Mode with the WDG (WDGHALT option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
9.1.8 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
9.1.9 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
9.2 MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK AND BEEPER (MCC/RTC) . 48  
9.2.1 Programmable CPU Clock Prescaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
9.2.2 Clock-out Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
9.2.3 Real Time Clock Timer (RTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
9.2.4 Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
9.2.5 Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
9.2.6 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
9.2.7 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
9.3 16-BIT TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
9.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
9.3.2 Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
9.3.3 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
9.3.4 Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
9.3.5 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
9.3.6 Summary of Timer modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
9.3.7 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
9.4 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
9.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
9.4.2 Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
9.4.3 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
9.4.4 Clock Phase and Clock Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
9.4.5 Error Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
9.4.6 Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
9.4.7 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
9.4.8 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
9.5 10-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
9.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
9.5.2 Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
9.5.3 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
9.5.4 Low Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
9.5.5 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
9.5.6 Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
10 INSTRUCTION SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
10.1 CPU ADDRESSING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
10.1.1 Inherent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
10.1.2 Immediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
10.1.3 Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
10.1.4 Indexed (No Offset, Short, Long) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
10.1.5 Indirect (Short, Long) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
10.1.6 Indirect Indexed (Short, Long) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
10.1.7 Relative mode (Direct, Indirect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
3/140  
1
Table of Contents  
10.2 INSTRUCTION GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
11 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
11.1 PARAMETER CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
11.1.1 Minimum and Maximum values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
11.1.2 Typical values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
11.1.3 Typical curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
11.1.4 Loading capacitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
11.1.5 Pin input voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
11.2 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
11.2.1 Voltage Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
11.2.2 Current Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
11.2.3 Thermal Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
11.3 OPERATING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
11.3.1 Operating Conditions (ST72323 5V devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
11.3.2 Operating Conditions (ST72323L 3V devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
11.4 SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
11.4.1 Supply and Clock Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
11.4.2 On-Chip Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
11.5 CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
11.5.1 General Timings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
11.5.2 External Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
11.5.3 Crystal and Ceramic Resonator Oscillators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
11.5.4 RC Oscillators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
11.6 MEMORY CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
11.6.1 RAM and Hardware Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
11.7 EMC CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
11.7.1 Functional EMS (Electro Magnetic Susceptibility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
11.7.2 Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
11.7.3 Absolute Maximum Ratings (Electrical Sensitivity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
11.8 I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
11.8.1 General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
11.8.2 Output Driving Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
11.9 CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
11.9.1 Asynchronous RESET Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
11.9.2 ICCSEL Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
11.10 TIMER PERIPHERAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
11.10.116-Bit Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
11.11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
11.11.1SPI - Serial Peripheral Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
11.12 10-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
11.12.1Analog Power Supply and Reference Pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
11.12.2General PCB Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
11.12.3ADC Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
12 PACKAGE CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
12.1 PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
12.2 THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
4/140  
1
Table of Contents  
12.3 SOLDERING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
13 ST72323 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
13.1 FLASH OPTION BYTES (ST72F324B COMPATIBLE SUPERSET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
13.2 ROM DEVICE ORDERING INFORMATION AND TRANSFER OF CUSTOMER CODE 127  
13.3 VERSION-SPECIFIC SALES CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
13.4 ORDERING INFORMATION FOR COMPATIBLE FLASH DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
13.5 DEVELOPMENT TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
13.5.1 Socket and Emulator Adapter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
13.6 ST7 APPLICATION NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
14 KNOWN LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
14.1 UNEXPECTED RESET FETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
14.2 CLEARING ACTIVE INTERRUPTS OUTSIDE INTERRUPT ROUTINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
14.3 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT MISSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
14.4 16-BIT TIMER PWM MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
14.5 ST72F324B COMPATIBLE FLASH DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
14.5.1 Internal RC Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
15 REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
5/140  
1
ST72323  
tion set and are available with ROM program  
memory.  
1 INTRODUCTION  
ST72323L and ST72323 ROM devices are mem-  
bers of the ST7 microcontroller family designed for  
the 3V and 5V operating range.  
Under software control, all devices can be placed  
in WAIT, SLOW, ACTIVE-HALT or HALT mode,  
reducing power consumption when the application  
is in idle or stand-by state.  
– The 32/34-pin (K) devices are designed for mid-  
range applications  
The enhanced instruction set and addressing  
modes of the ST7 offer both power and flexibility to  
software developers, enabling the design of highly  
efficient and compact application code. In addition  
to standard 8-bit data management, all ST7 micro-  
controllers feature bit manipulation, 8x8 unsigned  
multiplication and indirect addressing modes.  
– The 42/44/48-pin (J and C) devices target the  
same range of applications requiring more than  
24 I/O ports.  
All devices are based on a common industry-  
standard 8-bit core, featuring an enhanced instruc-  
Figure 1. Device Block Diagram  
8-BIT CORE  
ALU  
PROGRAM  
MEMORY  
(4/8K Bytes)  
RESET  
ICCSEL  
CONTROL  
RAM  
(384 Bytes)  
V
V
SS  
DD  
WATCHDOG  
OSC1  
OSC2  
OSC  
MCC/RTC/BEEP  
PA7:3  
PORT A  
(5 bits on J/C devices)  
(4 bits on K devices)  
PORT F  
TIMER A  
BEEP  
PF7:6,4,2:0  
(6 bits on J/C devices)  
(5 bits on K devices)  
PB4:0  
PORT B  
(5 bits on J/C devices)  
(3 bits on K devices)  
PE1:0  
(2 bits)  
PORT E  
PORT C  
PC7:0  
TIMER B  
(8 bits)  
PORT D  
PD5:0  
(6 bits on J/C devices)  
(2 bits on K devices)  
SPI  
10-BIT ADC  
V
AREF  
V
SSA  
6/140  
3
ST72323  
2 PIN DESCRIPTION  
Figure 2. 48-Pin Device Pinout  
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37  
36  
PE1  
PA4 (HS)  
1
PB0  
PB1  
NC  
2
35  
34  
33  
32  
31  
NC  
3
ei2  
ei3  
PB2  
PA3 (HS)  
4
PB3  
PC7 / SS / AIN15  
PC6 / SCK / ICCCLK  
5
(HS) PB4  
AIN0 / PD0  
AIN1 / PD1  
AIN2 / PD2  
AIN3 / PD3  
AIN4 / PD4  
ei0  
6
30 PC5 / MOSI / AIN14  
7
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
PC4 / MISO / ICCDATA  
PC3 (HS) / ICAP1_B  
8
9
PC2 (HS) / ICAP2_B  
10  
11  
PC1 / OCMP1_B / AIN13  
PC0 / OCMP2_B / AIN12  
ei1  
AIN5 / PD5 12  
24  
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23  
7/140  
ST72323  
Figure 3. 44-Pin LQFP Package Pinouts  
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34  
PE1  
PB0  
NC  
1
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
NC  
2
PB1  
PA3 (HS)  
3
ei0  
ei2  
ei3  
PB2  
PC7 / SS / AIN15  
PC6 / SCK / ICCCLK  
PC5 / MOSI / AIN14  
PC4 / MISO / ICCDATA  
PC3 (HS) / ICAP1_B  
PC2 (HS) / ICAP2_B  
PC1 / OCMP1_B / AIN13  
PC0 / OCMP2_B / AIN12  
4
PB3  
5
(HS) PB4  
AIN0 / PD0  
AIN1 / PD1  
AIN2 / PD2  
AIN3 / PD3  
AIN4 / PD4  
6
7
8
9
ei1  
10  
11  
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22  
(HS) 20mA high sink capability  
eix associated external interrupt vector  
8/140  
1
ST72323  
PIN DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)  
Figure 4. 32-Pin SDIP Package Pinout  
PB3  
PB0  
(HS) PB4  
1
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
ei3  
ei1  
ei2  
AIN0 / PD0  
AIN1 / PD1  
2
PE1  
PE0  
3
V
4
AREF  
V
_2  
V
5
DD  
SSA  
OSC1  
OSC2  
MCO / AIN8 / PF0  
BEEP / (HS) PF1  
6
7
OCMP1_A / AIN10 / PF4  
V
_2  
8
SS  
ICAP1_A / (HS) PF6  
EXTCLK_A / (HS) PF7  
AIN12 / OCMP2_B / PC0  
RESET  
ICCSEL  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
PA7 (HS)  
AIN13 / OCMP1_B / PC1  
ICAP2_B / (HS) PC2  
ICAP1_B / (HS) PC3  
ICCDATA/ MISO / PC4  
AIN14 / MOSI / PC5  
PA6 (HS)  
PA4 (HS)  
PA3 (HS)  
ei0  
PC7 / SS / AIN15  
PC6 / SCK / ICCCLK  
(HS) 20mA high sink capability  
eix associated external interrupt vector  
Figure 5. 32-Pin LQFP 7x7 Package Pinout  
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25  
V
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
OSC1  
OSC2  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AREF  
ei3 ei2  
V
SSA  
MCO / AIN8 / PF0  
BEEP / (HS) PF1  
V
_2  
SS  
ei1  
RESET  
OCMP1_A / AIN10 / PF4  
ICAP1_A / (HS) PF6  
ICCSEL  
PA7 (HS)  
PA6 (HS)  
PA4 (HS)  
EXTCLK_A / (HS) PF7  
AIN12 / OCMP2_B / PC0  
ei0  
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
(HS) 20mA high sink capability  
eix associated external interrupt vector  
9/140  
1
ST72323  
PIN DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)  
Figure 6. 34-Pin SO Package Pinout  
PB3  
34  
33  
32  
(HS) PB4  
1
ei2  
PB0  
PE1  
AIN0 / PD0  
AIN1 / PD1  
2
ei3  
ei1  
3
PE0  
V
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
4
AREF  
V
_2  
V
DD  
5
SSA  
OSC1  
OSC2  
MCO / AIN8 / PF0  
BEEP / (HS) PF1  
6
7
V
_2  
OCMP1_A / AIN10 / PF4  
8
SS  
NC  
NC  
ICAP1_A / (HS) PF6  
EXTCLK_A / (HS) PF7  
9
RESET  
ICCSEL  
10  
11  
12  
AIN12 / OCMP2_B / PC0  
AIN13 / OCMP1_B / PC1  
ICAP2_B / (HS) PC2  
ICAP1_B / (HS) PC3  
ICCDATA/ MISO / PC4  
AIN14 / MOSI / PC5  
PA7 (HS)  
PA6 (HS)  
PA4 (HS)  
13  
14  
PA3 (HS)  
ei0  
15  
PC7 / SS / AIN15  
PC6 / SCK / ICCCLK  
16  
17  
(HS) 20mA high sink capability  
eix associated external interrupt vector  
10/140  
1
ST72323  
PIN DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)  
For external pin connection guidelines, refer to See “ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS” on page 91.  
Legend / Abbreviations for Table 1:  
Type:  
I = input, O = output, S = supply  
A = Dedicated analog input  
Input level:  
In/Output level: C = CMOS 0.3V /0.7V  
DD  
DD  
DD  
C = CMOS 0.3V /0.7V with input trigger  
T
DD  
Output level:  
HS = 20mA high sink (on N-buffer only)  
Port and control configuration:  
1)  
– Input:  
float = floating, wpu = weak pull-up, int = interrupt , ana = analog ports  
2)  
– Output:  
OD = open drain , PP = push-pull  
Refer to “I/O PORTS” on page 37 for more details on the software configuration of the I/O ports.  
The RESET configuration of each pin is shown in bold. This configuration is valid as long as the device is  
in reset state.  
Table 1. Device Pin Description  
Pin n°  
Level  
Port  
Input  
Main  
function  
(after  
Output  
Pin Name  
Alternate Function  
reset)  
6
7
8
9
6 30 1  
7 31 2  
8 32 3  
9
1
2
3
PB4 (HS)  
I/O C  
I/O C  
I/O C  
I/O C  
I/O C  
I/O C  
I/O C  
S
HS  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ei3  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port B4  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
PD0/AIN0  
PD1/AIN1  
PD2/AIN2  
PD3/AIN3  
PD4/AIN4  
PD5/AIN5  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port D0 ADC Analog Input 0  
Port D1 ADC Analog Input 1  
Port D2 ADC Analog Input 2  
Port D3 ADC Analog Input 3  
Port D4 ADC Analog Input 4  
Port D5 ADC Analog Input 5  
Analog Reference Voltage for ADC  
Analog Ground Voltage  
X
X
X
X
X
10 10  
11 11  
12 12  
13 13 1  
14 14 2  
4
5
4
5
V
V
AREF  
SSA  
S
Main clock  
out (f  
ADC Analog  
Input 8  
15 15 3  
6
7
6
7
PF0/MCO/AIN8  
I/O C  
X
ei1  
X
X
X
X
Port F0  
T
)
CPU  
16 16 4  
17 17  
PF1 (HS)/BEEP  
PF2 (HS)  
I/O C  
I/O C  
HS  
HS  
X
X
ei1  
ei1  
X
X
X
X
Port F1 Beep signal output  
Port F2  
T
T
Timer A Out-  
Port F4 putCompare  
1
PF4/OCMP1_A/  
AIN10  
ADC Analog  
Input 10  
18 18 5  
8
8
I/O C  
X
X
X
X
T
19 19 6 9 10 PF6 (HS)/ICAP1_A I/O C  
PF7 (HS)/  
HS  
HS  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port F6 Timer A Input Capture 1  
T
T
Timer A External Clock  
20 20 7 10 11  
I/O C  
Port F7  
Source  
EXTCLK_A  
21 21  
22 22  
V
V
S
S
Digital Main Supply Voltage  
Digital Ground Voltage  
DD_0  
SS_0  
Timer B Out-  
ADC Analog  
Port C0 putCompare  
Input 12  
PC0/OCMP2_B/  
AIN12  
25 23 8 11 12  
I/O C  
X
X
X
X
X
T
2
11/140  
1
ST72323  
Pin n°  
Level  
Port  
Input  
Main  
function  
(after  
Output  
Pin Name  
Alternate Function  
reset)  
Timer B Out-  
Port C1 putCompare  
1
PC1/OCMP1_B/  
AIN13  
ADC Analog  
Input 13  
26 24 9 12 13  
I/O C  
X
X
X
X
X
T
27 25 10 13 14 PC2 (HS)/ICAP2_B I/O C  
28 26 11 14 15 PC3 (HS)/ICAP1_B I/O C  
HS  
HS  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port C2 Timer B Input Capture 2  
Port C3 Timer B Input Capture 1  
T
T
SPI Master  
ICC Data In-  
Port C4 In / Slave  
put  
PC4/MISO/  
ICCDATA  
29 27 12 15 16  
I/O C  
I/O C  
X
X
X
X
T
Out Data  
SPI Master  
ADC Analog  
30 28 13 16 17 PC5/MOSI/AIN14  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port C5 Out / Slave  
Input 14  
T
T
In Data  
SPI Serial  
Clock  
ICC Clock  
Output  
31 29 14 17 18 PC6/SCK/ICCCLK I/O C  
Port C6  
SPI Slave  
Port C7 Select (ac-  
tive low)  
ADC Analog  
Input 15  
32 30 15 18 19 PC7/SS/AIN15  
33 31 16 19 20 PA3 (HS)  
I/O C  
X
X
X
X
X
X
T
T
I/O C  
S
HS  
ei0  
Port A3  
34 32  
35 33  
NC  
NC  
Not connected  
Not connected  
Port A4  
S
36 34 17 20 21 PA4 (HS)  
37 35 PA5 (HS)  
I/O C  
I/O C  
I/O C  
I/O C  
I
HS  
HS  
HS  
HS  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
T
T
X
X
T
T
T
T
Port A5  
1)  
38 36 18 21 22 PA6 (HS)  
39 37 19 22 23 PA7 (HS)  
40 38 20 23 24 ICCSEL  
43 39 21 24 25 RESET  
Port A6  
1)  
Port A7  
Must be tied low.  
I/O C  
S
Top priority non maskable interrupt.  
Digital Ground Voltage  
T
44 40 22 25 27 V  
SS_2  
45 41 23 26 28 OSC2  
O
Resonator oscillator inverter output  
External clock input or Resonator os-  
cillator inverter input  
46 42 24 27 29 OSC1  
I
47 43 25 28 30 V  
S
Digital Main Supply Voltage  
DD_2  
48 44 26 29 31 PE0  
I/O C  
I/O C  
I/O C  
I/O C  
I/O C  
I/O C  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port E0  
Port E1  
Port B0  
Port B1  
Port B2  
Port B3  
T
T
T
T
T
T
1
2
3
4
5
1 27 30 32 PE1  
2 28 31 33 PB0  
ei2  
3
4
PB1  
PB2  
ei2  
ei2  
5 29 32 34 PB3  
ei2  
Notes:  
1. In the interrupt input column, “eiX” defines the associated external interrupt vector. If the weak pull-up  
column (wpu) is merged with the interrupt column (int), then the I/O configuration is pull-up interrupt input,  
else the configuration is floating interrupt input.  
2. In the open drain output column, “T” defines a true open drain I/O (P-Buffer and protection diode to V  
DD  
are not implemented). See See “I/O PORTS” on page 37. and Section 11.8 I/O PORT PIN CHARACTER-  
12/140  
1
ST72323  
ISTICS for more details.  
3. OSC1 and OSC2 pins connect a crystal/ceramic resonator, or an external source to the on-chip oscil-  
lator; see Section 1 INTRODUCTION and Section 11.5 CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS for  
more details.  
4. On the chip, each I/O port has 8 pads. Pads that are not bonded to external pins are in input pull-up con-  
figuration after reset. The configuration of these pads must be kept at reset state to avoid added current  
consumption.  
13/140  
1
ST72323  
3 REGISTER & MEMORY MAP  
As shown in Figure 7, the MCU is capable of ad-  
dressing 64K bytes of memories and I/O registers.  
The highest address bytes contain the user reset  
and interrupt vectors.  
The available memory locations consist of 128  
bytes of register locations, 386 bytes of RAM and  
8Kbytes of user program memory. The RAM  
space includes up to 256 bytes for the stack from  
0100h to 01FFh.  
IMPORTANT: Memory locations marked as “Re-  
served” must never be accessed. Accessing a re-  
seved area can have unpredictable effects on the  
device.  
Figure 7. Memory Map  
0000h  
HW Registers  
(see Table 2)  
0080h  
007Fh  
Short Addressing  
0080h  
RAM (zero page)  
RAM  
(384 Bytes)  
00FFh  
0100h  
256 Bytes Stack  
01FFh  
01FFh  
0200h  
Reserved  
0FFFh  
1000h  
Program Memory  
(8K)  
FFDFh  
FFE0h  
Interrupt & Reset Vectors  
(see Table 6)  
FFFFh  
14/140  
1
ST72323  
Table 2. Hardware Register Map  
Register  
Label  
Reset  
Status  
Address  
Block  
Register Name  
Remarks  
1)  
0000h  
0001h  
0002h  
PADR  
PADDR  
PAOR  
Port A Data Register  
Port A Data Direction Register  
Port A Option Register  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
2)  
Port A  
Port B  
00h  
00h  
1)  
0003h  
0004h  
0005h  
PBDR  
PBDDR  
PBOR  
Port B Data Register  
Port B Data Direction Register  
Port B Option Register  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
2)  
00h  
00h  
1)  
0006h  
0007h  
0008h  
PCDR  
PCDDR  
PCOR  
Port C Data Register  
Port C Data Direction Register  
Port C Option Register  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Port C  
00h  
00h  
1)  
0009h  
000Ah  
000Bh  
PDADR  
PDDDR  
PDOR  
Port D Data Register  
Port D Data Direction Register  
Port D Option Register  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
2)  
Port D  
Port E  
Port F  
00h  
00h  
1)  
000Ch  
000Dh  
000Eh  
PEDR  
PEDDR  
PEOR  
Port E Data Register  
Port E Data Direction Register  
Port E Option Register  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
2)  
2)  
2)  
00h  
00h  
2)  
1)  
000Fh  
0010h  
0011h  
PFDR  
PFDDR  
PFOR  
Port F Data Register  
Port F Data Direction Register  
Port F Option Register  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
00h  
00h  
0012h  
to  
Reserved Area (15 Bytes)  
0020h  
0021h  
0022h  
0023h  
SPIDR  
SPICR  
SPICSR  
SPI Data I/O Register  
SPI Control Register  
SPI Control/Status Register  
xxh  
0xh  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
SPI  
ITC  
0024h  
0025h  
0026h  
0027h  
ISPR0  
ISPR1  
ISPR2  
ISPR3  
Interrupt Software Priority Register 0  
Interrupt Software Priority Register 1  
Interrupt Software Priority Register 2  
Interrupt Software Priority Register 3  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
FFh  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0028h  
0029h  
002Ah  
002Bh  
EICR  
External Interrupt Control Register  
Reserved Area (1 Byte)  
00h  
R/W  
WATCHDOG  
MCC  
WDGCR  
Watchdog Control Register  
Reserved Area (1 Byte)  
7Fh  
R/W  
002Ch  
002Dh  
MCCSR  
MCCBCR  
Main Clock Control / Status Register  
Main Clock Controller: Beep Control Register  
00h  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
002Eh  
to  
Reserved Area (3 Bytes)  
0030h  
15/140  
1
ST72323  
Register  
Label  
Reset  
Status  
Address  
Block  
Register Name  
Remarks  
0031h  
0032h  
0033h  
0034h  
0035h  
0036h  
0037h  
0038h  
0039h  
003Ah  
003Bh  
003Ch  
003Dh  
003Eh  
003Fh  
TACR2  
TACR1  
TACSR  
TAIC1HR  
TAIC1LR  
TAOC1HR  
TAOC1LR  
TACHR  
Timer A Control Register 2  
Timer A Control Register 1  
Timer A Control/Status Register  
Timer A Input Capture 1 High Register  
Timer A Input Capture 1 Low Register  
Timer A Output Compare 1 High Register  
Timer A Output Compare 1 Low Register  
Timer A Counter High Register  
00h  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
xxxx x0xxb R/W  
xxh  
xxh  
80h  
00h  
FFh  
FCh  
FFh  
FCh  
xxh  
xxh  
80h  
00h  
Read Only  
Read Only  
R/W  
R/W  
TIMER A  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
R/W  
TACLR  
Timer A Counter Low Register  
TAACHR  
TAACLR  
TAIC2HR  
TAIC2LR  
TAOC2HR  
TAOC2LR  
Timer A Alternate Counter High Register  
Timer A Alternate Counter Low Register  
Timer A Input Capture 2 High Register  
Timer A Input Capture 2 Low Register  
Timer A Output Compare 2 High Register  
Timer A Output Compare 2 Low Register  
R/W  
0040h  
Reserved Area (1 Byte)  
0041h  
0042h  
0043h  
0044h  
0045h  
0046h  
0047h  
0048h  
0049h  
004Ah  
004Bh  
004Ch  
004Dh  
004Eh  
004Fh  
TBCR2  
TBCR1  
TBCSR  
TBIC1HR  
TBIC1LR  
TBOC1HR  
TBOC1LR  
TBCHR  
Timer B Control Register 2  
Timer B Control Register 1  
Timer B Control/Status Register  
Timer B Input Capture 1 High Register  
Timer B Input Capture 1 Low Register  
Timer B Output Compare 1 High Register  
Timer B Output Compare 1 Low Register  
Timer B Counter High Register  
00h  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
xxxx x0xxb R/W  
xxh  
xxh  
80h  
00h  
FFh  
FCh  
FFh  
FCh  
xxh  
xxh  
80h  
00h  
Read Only  
Read Only  
R/W  
R/W  
TIMER B  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
R/W  
TBCLR  
Timer B Counter Low Register  
TBACHR  
TBACLR  
TBIC2HR  
TBIC2LR  
TBOC2HR  
TBOC2LR  
Timer B Alternate Counter High Register  
Timer B Alternate Counter Low Register  
Timer B Input Capture 2 High Register  
Timer B Input Capture 2 Low Register  
Timer B Output Compare 2 High Register  
Timer B Output Compare 2 Low Register  
R/W  
0050h  
to  
Reserved Area (32 Bytes)  
006Fh  
0070h  
0071h  
0072h  
ADCCSR  
ADCDRH  
ADCDRL  
Control/Status Register  
Data High Register  
Data Low Register  
00h  
00h  
00h  
R/W  
Read Only  
Read Only  
ADC  
0073h  
007Fh  
Reserved Area (13 Bytes)  
Legend: x=undefined, R/W=read/write  
Notes:  
1. The contents of the I/O port DR registers are readable only in output configuration. In input configura-  
tion, the values of the I/O pins are returned instead of the DR register contents.  
2. The bits associated with unavailable pins must always keep their reset value.  
16/140  
1
ST72323  
4 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT  
4.1 INTRODUCTION  
4.3 CPU REGISTERS  
This CPU has a full 8-bit architecture and contains  
six internal registers allowing efficient 8-bit data  
manipulation.  
The 6 CPU registers shown in Figure 8 are not  
present in the memory mapping and are accessed  
by specific instructions.  
Accumulator (A)  
4.2 MAIN FEATURES  
The Accumulator is an 8-bit general purpose reg-  
ister used to hold operands and the results of the  
arithmetic and logic calculations and to manipulate  
data.  
Enable executing 63 basic instructions  
Fast 8-bit by 8-bit multiply  
17 main addressing modes (with indirect  
Index Registers (X and Y)  
addressing mode)  
These 8-bit registers are used to create effective  
addresses or as temporary storage areas for data  
manipulation. (The Cross-Assembler generates a  
precede instruction (PRE) to indicate that the fol-  
lowing instruction refers to the Y register.)  
Two 8-bit index registers  
16-bit stack pointer  
Low power HALT and WAIT modes  
Priority maskable hardware interrupts  
Non-maskable software/hardware interrupts  
The Y register is not affected by the interrupt auto-  
matic procedures.  
Program Counter (PC)  
The program counter is a 16-bit register containing  
the address of the next instruction to be executed  
by the CPU. It is made of two 8-bit registers PCL  
(Program Counter Low which is the LSB) and PCH  
(Program Counter High which is the MSB).  
Figure 8. CPU Registers  
7
0
ACCUMULATOR  
RESET VALUE = XXh  
7
0
0
X INDEX REGISTER  
Y INDEX REGISTER  
RESET VALUE = XXh  
7
RESET VALUE = XXh  
PCL  
PCH  
7
8
15  
0
PROGRAM COUNTER  
RESET VALUE = RESET VECTOR @ FFFEh-FFFFh  
7
1
0
1
1
I1 H I0 N Z C  
CONDITION CODE REGISTER  
RESET VALUE =  
8
1
1
X 1 X X X  
0
15  
7
STACK POINTER  
RESET VALUE = STACK HIGHER ADDRESS  
X = Undefined Value  
17/140  
1
ST72323  
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (Cont’d)  
Condition Code Register (CC)  
Read/Write  
Bit 1 = Z Zero.  
This bit is set and cleared by hardware. This bit in-  
dicates that the result of the last arithmetic, logical  
or data manipulation is zero.  
0: The result of the last operation is different from  
zero.  
1: The result of the last operation is zero.  
Reset Value: 111x1xxx  
7
0
1
1
I1  
H
I0  
N
Z
C
This bit is accessed by the JREQ and JRNE test  
instructions.  
The 8-bit Condition Code register contains the in-  
terrupt masks and four flags representative of the  
result of the instruction just executed. This register  
can also be handled by the PUSH and POP in-  
structions.  
Bit 0 = C Carry/borrow.  
This bit is set and cleared by hardware and soft-  
ware. It indicates an overflow or an underflow has  
occurred during the last arithmetic operation.  
0: No overflow or underflow has occurred.  
1: An overflow or underflow has occurred.  
These bits can be individually tested and/or con-  
trolled by specific instructions.  
Arithmetic Management Bits  
This bit is driven by the SCF and RCF instructions  
and tested by the JRC and JRNC instructions. It is  
also affected by the “bit test and branch”, shift and  
rotate instructions.  
Bit 4 = H Half carry.  
This bit is set by hardware when a carry occurs be-  
tween bits 3 and 4 of the ALU during an ADD or  
ADC instructions. It is reset by hardware during  
the same instructions.  
Interrupt Management Bits  
Bit 5,3 = I1, I0 Interrupt  
0: No half carry has occurred.  
1: A half carry has occurred.  
The combination of the I1 and I0 bits gives the cur-  
rent interrupt software priority.  
This bit is tested using the JRH or JRNH instruc-  
tion. The H bit is useful in BCD arithmetic subrou-  
tines.  
Interrupt Software Priority  
Level 0 (main)  
I1  
1
0
0
1
I0  
0
1
0
1
Level 1  
Bit 2 = N Negative.  
Level 2  
This bit is set and cleared by hardware. It is repre-  
sentative of the result sign of the last arithmetic,  
logical or data manipulation. It’s a copy of the re-  
Level 3 (= interrupt disable)  
These two bits are set/cleared by hardware when  
entering in interrupt. The loaded value is given by  
the corresponding bits in the interrupt software pri-  
ority registers (IxSPR). They can be also set/  
cleared by software with the RIM, SIM, IRET,  
HALT, WFI and PUSH/POP instructions.  
th  
sult 7 bit.  
0: The result of the last operation is positive or null.  
1: The result of the last operation is negative  
(i.e. the most significant bit is a logic 1).  
This bit is accessed by the JRMI and JRPL instruc-  
tions.  
See the interrupt management chapter for more  
details.  
18/140  
1
ST72323  
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (Cont’d)  
Stack Pointer (SP)  
Read/Write  
The least significant byte of the Stack Pointer  
(called S) can be directly accessed by a LD in-  
struction.  
Reset Value: 01 FFh  
Note: When the lower limit is exceeded, the Stack  
Pointer wraps around to the stack upper limit, with-  
out indicating the stack overflow. The previously  
stored information is then overwritten and there-  
fore lost. The stack also wraps in case of an under-  
flow.  
15  
8
1
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The stack is used to save the return address dur-  
ing a subroutine call and the CPU context during  
an interrupt. The user may also directly manipulate  
the stack by means of the PUSH and POP instruc-  
tions. In the case of an interrupt, the PCL is stored  
at the first location pointed to by the SP. Then the  
other registers are stored in the next locations as  
shown in Figure 9.  
SP7  
SP6  
SP5  
SP4  
SP3  
SP2  
SP1  
SP0  
The Stack Pointer is a 16-bit register which is al-  
ways pointing to the next free location in the stack.  
It is then decremented after data has been pushed  
onto the stack and incremented before data is  
popped from the stack (see Figure 9).  
– When an interrupt is received, the SP is decre-  
mented and the context is pushed on the stack.  
Since the stack is 256 bytes deep, the 8 most sig-  
nificant bits are forced by hardware. Following an  
MCU Reset, or after a Reset Stack Pointer instruc-  
tion (RSP), the Stack Pointer contains its reset val-  
ue (the SP7 to SP0 bits are set) which is the stack  
higher address.  
– On return from interrupt, the SP is incremented  
and the context is popped from the stack.  
A subroutine call occupies two locations and an in-  
terrupt five locations in the stack area.  
Figure 9. Stack Manipulation Example  
CALL  
Subroutine  
RET  
or RSP  
PUSH Y  
POP Y  
IRET  
Interrupt  
Event  
@ 0100h  
SP  
SP  
SP  
Y
CC  
A
CC  
A
CC  
A
X
X
X
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
SP  
SP  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
SP  
@ 01FFh  
Stack Higher Address = 01FFh  
0100h  
Stack Lower Address =  
19/140  
1
ST72323  
5 SUPPLY, RESET AND CLOCK MANAGEMENT  
The device includes a range of utility features for  
securing the application in critical situations (for  
example in case of a power brown-out), and re-  
ducing the number of external components. An  
overview is shown in Figure 10.  
Main features  
Reset Sequence Manager (RSM)  
Multi-Oscillator Clock Management (MO)  
– 5 Crystal/Ceramic resonator oscillators  
– 1 Internal RC oscillator  
For more details, refer to dedicated parametric  
section.  
Figure 10. Clock, Reset and Supply Block Diagram  
MAIN CLOCK  
CONTROLLER  
WITH REALTIME  
MULTI-  
OSCILLATOR  
(MO)  
OSC2  
OSC1  
f
f
OSC  
f
CPU  
OSC2  
/2  
DIVIDER  
to CPU and peripherals  
CLOCK (MCC/RTC)  
RESET SEQUENCE  
MANAGER  
WATCHDOG  
TIMER (WDG)  
RESET  
(RSM)  
20/140  
1
ST72323  
5.1 MULTI-OSCILLATOR (MO)  
The main clock of the ST7 can be generated by  
three different source types coming from the multi-  
oscillator block:  
These oscillators are not stopped during the  
RESET phase to avoid losing time in the oscillator  
start-up phase.  
an external source  
Internal RC Oscillator  
4 crystal or ceramic resonator oscillators  
an internal high frequency RC oscillator  
This oscillator allows a low cost solution for the  
main clock of the ST7 using only an internal resis-  
tor and capacitor. Internal RC oscillator mode has  
the drawback of a lower frequency accuracy and  
should not be used in applications that require ac-  
curate timing.  
Each oscillator is optimized for a given frequency  
range in terms of consumption and is selectable  
through the option byte. The associated hardware  
configurations are shown in Table 3. Refer to the  
electrical characteristics section for more details.  
In this mode, the two oscillator pins have to be tied  
to ground.  
Caution: The OSC1 and/or OSC2 pins must not  
be left unconnected. For the purposes of Failure  
Mode and Effect Analysis, it should be noted that if  
the OSC1 and/or OSC2 pins are left unconnected,  
the ST7 main oscillator may start and, in this con-  
Table 3. ST7 Clock Sources  
Hardware Configuration  
figuration, could generate an f  
clock frequency  
OSC  
in excess of the allowed maximum (>16MHz.),  
putting the ST7 in an unsafe/undefined state. The  
product behaviour must therefore be considered  
undefined when the OSC pins are left unconnect-  
ed.  
ST7  
OSC1  
OSC2  
EXTERNAL  
SOURCE  
External Clock Source  
In this external clock mode, a clock signal (square,  
sinus or triangle) with ~50% duty cycle has to drive  
the OSC1 pin while the OSC2 pin is tied to ground.  
ST7  
Crystal/Ceramic Oscillators  
OSC1  
OSC2  
This family of oscillators has the advantage of pro-  
ducing a very accurate rate on the main clock of  
the ST7. The selection within a list of 4 oscillators  
with different frequency ranges has to be done by  
option byte in order to reduce consumption (refer  
to Section 13.1 on page 125 for more details on  
the frequency ranges). In this mode of the multi-  
oscillator, the resonator and the load capacitors  
have to be placed as close as possible to the oscil-  
lator pins in order to minimize output distortion and  
start-up stabilization time. The loading capaci-  
tance values must be adjusted according to the  
selected oscillator.  
C
C
L2  
L1  
LOAD  
CAPACITORS  
ST7  
OSC1  
OSC2  
21/140  
1
ST72323  
5.2 RESET SEQUENCE MANAGER (RSM)  
5.2.1 Introduction  
5.2.2 Asynchronous External RESET pin  
The reset sequence manager includes three RE-  
SET sources as shown in Figure 12:  
External RESET source pulse  
Internal WATCHDOG RESET  
The RESET pin is both an input and an open-drain  
output with integrated R  
weak pull-up resistor.  
ON  
This pull-up has no fixed value but varies in ac-  
cordance with the input voltage. It can be pulled  
low by external circuitry to reset the device. See  
Electrical Characteristic section for more details.  
These sources act on the RESET pin and it is al-  
ways kept low during the delay phase.  
A RESET signal originating from an external  
The RESET service routine vector is fixed at ad-  
dresses FFFEh-FFFFh in the ST7 memory map.  
source must have a duration of at least t  
in  
h(RSTL)in  
order to be recognized. This detection is asynchro-  
nous and therefore the MCU can enter reset state  
even in HALT mode.  
The basic RESET sequence consists of 3 phases  
as shown in Figure 11:  
The RESET pin is an asynchronous signal which  
plays a major role in EMS performance. In a noisy  
environment, it is recommended to follow the  
guidelines mentioned in the electrical characteris-  
tics section.  
Active Phase depending on the RESET source  
256 or 4096 CPU clock cycle delay (selected by  
option byte)  
RESET vector fetch  
The 256 or 4096 CPU clock cycle delay allows the  
oscillator to stabilise and ensures that recovery  
has taken place from the Reset state. The shorter  
or longer clock cycle delay should be selected by  
option byte to correspond to the stabilization time  
of the external oscillator used in the application.  
5.2.3 External Power-On RESET  
To start up the microcontroller correctly, the user  
must ensure by means of an external reset circuit  
that the reset signal is held low until V  
is over  
DD  
the minimum level specified for the selected f  
frequency.  
OSC  
The RESET vector fetch phase duration is 2 clock  
cycles.  
A proper reset signal for a slow rising V supply  
DD  
can generally be provided by an external RC net-  
work connected to the RESET pin.  
Figure 11. RESET Sequence Phases  
5.2.4 Internal Watchdog RESET  
Starting from the Watchdog counter underflow, the  
device RESET pin acts as an output that is pulled  
RESET  
INTERNAL RESET  
256 or 4096 CLOCK CYCLES  
FETCH  
VECTOR  
low during at least t  
.
w(RSTL)out  
Active Phase  
Figure 12. Reset Block Diagram  
V
DD  
R
ON  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
Filter  
RESET  
PULSE  
GENERATOR  
WATCHDOG RESET  
22/140  
1
ST72323  
6 INTERRUPTS  
6.1 INTRODUCTION  
When an interrupt request has to be serviced:  
– Normal processing is suspended at the end of  
the current instruction execution.  
– The PC, X, A and CC registers are saved onto  
the stack.  
– I1 and I0 bits of CC register are set according to  
the corresponding values in the ISPRx registers  
of the serviced interrupt vector.  
– The PC is then loaded with the interrupt vector of  
the interrupt to service and the first instruction of  
the interrupt service routine is fetched (refer to  
“Interrupt Mapping” table for vector addresses).  
The ST7 enhanced interrupt management pro-  
vides the following features:  
Hardware interrupts  
Software interrupt (TRAP)  
Nested or concurrent interrupt management  
with flexible interrupt priority and level  
management:  
– Up to 4 software programmable nesting levels  
– Up to 16 interrupt vectors fixed by hardware  
– 2 non maskable events: RESET, TRAP  
This interrupt management is based on:  
The interrupt service routine should end with the  
IRET instruction which causes the contents of the  
saved registers to be recovered from the stack.  
– Bit 5 and bit 3 of the CPU CC register (I1:0),  
– Interrupt software priority registers (ISPRx),  
– Fixed interrupt vector addresses located at the  
high addresses of the memory map (FFE0h to  
FFFFh) sorted by hardware priority order.  
Note: As a consequence of the IRET instruction,  
the I1 and I0 bits will be restored from the stack  
and the program in the previous level will resume.  
This enhanced interrupt controller guarantees full  
upward compatibility with the standard (not nest-  
ed) ST7 interrupt controller.  
Table 4. Interrupt Software Priority Levels  
Interrupt software priority Level  
I1  
1
I0  
0
Level 0 (main)  
Level 1  
Low  
6.2 MASKING AND PROCESSING FLOW  
0
1
Level 2  
0
0
The interrupt masking is managed by the I1 and I0  
bits of the CC register and the ISPRx registers  
which give the interrupt software priority level of  
each interrupt vector (see Table 4). The process-  
ing flow is shown in Figure 13  
Level 3 (= interrupt disable)  
High  
1
1
Figure 13. Interrupt Processing Flowchart  
PENDING  
INTERRUPT  
Y
Y
RESET  
TRAP  
N
Interrupt has the same or a  
lower software priority  
than current one  
N
I1:0  
FETCH NEXT  
INSTRUCTION  
THE INTERRUPT  
STAYS PENDING  
Y
“IRET”  
N
RESTORE PC, X, A, CC  
FROM STACK  
EXECUTE  
INSTRUCTION  
STACK PC, X, A, CC  
LOAD I1:0 FROM INTERRUPT SW REG.  
LOAD PC FROM INTERRUPT VECTOR  
23/140  
1
ST72323  
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)  
Servicing Pending Interrupts  
vector is loaded in the PC register and the I1 and  
I0 bits of the CC are set to disable interrupts (level  
3). These sources allow the processor to exit  
HALT mode.  
As several interrupts can be pending at the same  
time, the interrupt to be taken into account is deter-  
mined by the following two-step process:  
TRAP (Non Maskable Software Interrupt)  
– the highest software priority interrupt is serviced,  
This software interrupt is serviced when the TRAP  
instruction is executed. It will be serviced accord-  
ing to the flowchart in Figure 13.  
– if several interrupts have the same software pri-  
ority then the interrupt with the highest hardware  
priority is serviced first.  
RESET  
Figure 14 describes this decision process.  
The RESET source has the highest priority in the  
ST7. This means that the first current routine has  
the highest software priority (level 3) and the high-  
est hardware priority.  
Figure 14. Priority Decision Process  
PENDING  
INTERRUPTS  
See the RESET chapter for more details.  
Maskable Sources  
Maskable interrupt vector sources can be serviced  
if the corresponding interrupt is enabled and if its  
own interrupt software priority (in ISPRx registers)  
is higher than the one currently being serviced (I1  
and I0 in CC register). If any of these two condi-  
tions is false, the interrupt is latched and thus re-  
mains pending.  
Different  
Same  
SOFTWARE  
PRIORITY  
HIGHEST SOFTWARE  
PRIORITY SERVICED  
External Interrupts  
HIGHEST HARDWARE  
PRIORITY SERVICED  
External interrupts allow the processor to exit from  
HALT low power mode. External interrupt sensitiv-  
ity is software selectable through the External In-  
terrupt Control register (EICR).  
External interrupt triggered on edge will be latched  
and the interrupt request automatically cleared  
upon entering the interrupt service routine.  
If several input pins of a group connected to the  
same interrupt line are selected simultaneously,  
these will be logically ORed.  
When an interrupt request is not serviced immedi-  
ately, it is latched and then processed when its  
software priority combined with the hardware pri-  
ority becomes the highest one.  
Note 1: The hardware priority is exclusive while  
the software one is not. This allows the previous  
process to succeed with only one interrupt.  
Note 2: RESET and TRAP can be considered as  
having the highest software priority in the decision  
process.  
Peripheral Interrupts  
Usually the peripheral interrupts cause the MCU to  
exit from HALT mode except those mentioned in  
the “Interrupt Mapping” table. A peripheral inter-  
rupt occurs when a specific flag is set in the pe-  
ripheral status registers and if the corresponding  
enable bit is set in the peripheral control register.  
The general sequence for clearing an interrupt is  
based on an access to the status register followed  
by a read or write to an associated register.  
Note: The clearing sequence resets the internal  
latch. A pending interrupt (i.e. waiting for being  
serviced) will therefore be lost if the clear se-  
quence is executed.  
Different Interrupt Vector Sources  
Two interrupt source types are managed by the  
ST7 interrupt controller: the non-maskable type  
(RESET,TRAP) and the maskable type (external  
or from internal peripherals).  
Non-Maskable Sources  
These sources are processed regardless of the  
state of the I1 and I0 bits of the CC register (see  
Figure 13). After stacking the PC, X, A and CC  
registers (except for RESET), the corresponding  
24/140  
1
ST72323  
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)  
6.3 INTERRUPTS AND LOW POWER MODES  
6.4 CONCURRENT & NESTED MANAGEMENT  
All interrupts allow the processor to exit the WAIT  
low power mode. On the contrary, only external  
and other specified interrupts allow the processor  
to exit from the HALT modes (see column “Exit  
from HALT” in “Interrupt Mapping” table). When  
several pending interrupts are present while exit-  
ing HALT mode, the first one serviced can only be  
an interrupt with exit from HALT mode capability  
and it is selected through the same decision proc-  
ess shown in Figure 14.  
The following Figure 15 and Figure 16 show two  
different interrupt management modes. The first is  
called concurrent mode and does not allow an in-  
terrupt to be interrupted, unlike the nested mode in  
Figure 16. The interrupt hardware priority is given  
in this order from the lowest to the highest: MAIN,  
IT4, IT3, IT2, IT1, IT0. The software priority is giv-  
en for each interrupt.  
Warning: A stack overflow may occur without no-  
tifying the software of the failure.  
Note: If an interrupt, that is not able to Exit from  
HALT mode, is pending with the highest priority  
when exiting HALT mode, this interrupt is serviced  
after the first one serviced.  
Figure 15. Concurrent Interrupt Management  
SOFTWARE  
PRIORITY  
I1  
I0  
LEVEL  
TRAP  
3
1 1  
1 1  
1 1  
1 1  
1 1  
1 1  
IT0  
3
IT1  
IT1  
3
IT2  
3
IT3  
3
RIM  
IT4  
3
MAIN  
MAIN  
3/0  
11 / 10  
10  
Figure 16. Nested Interrupt Management  
SOFTWARE  
PRIORITY  
LEVEL  
I1  
I0  
TRAP  
3
1 1  
1 1  
0 0  
0 1  
1 1  
1 1  
IT0  
3
IT1  
IT1  
IT2  
2
IT2  
1
IT3  
3
RIM  
IT4  
IT4  
3
MAIN  
MAIN  
3/0  
11 / 10  
10  
25/140  
1
ST72323  
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)  
6.5 INTERRUPT REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
CPU CC REGISTER INTERRUPT BITS  
Read/Write  
INTERRUPT SOFTWARE PRIORITY REGIS-  
TERS (ISPRX)  
Reset Value: 111x 1010 (xAh)  
Read/Write (bit 7:4 of ISPR3 are read only)  
7
0
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)  
7
0
1
1
I1  
H
I0  
N
Z
C
ISPR0  
ISPR1  
I1_3 I0_3 I1_2 I0_2 I1_1 I0_1 I1_0 I0_0  
I1_7 I0_7 I1_6 I0_6 I1_5 I0_5 I1_4 I0_4  
Bit 5, 3 = I1, I0 Software Interrupt Priority  
These two bits indicate the current interrupt soft-  
ware priority.  
ISPR2 I1_11 I0_11 I1_10 I0_10 I1_9 I0_9 I1_8 I0_8  
Interrupt Software Priority Level  
I1  
1
I0  
0
Level 0 (main)  
Level 1  
Low  
ISPR3  
1
1
1
1
I1_13 I0_13 I1_12 I0_12  
0
1
Level 2  
0
0
These four registers contain the interrupt software  
priority of each interrupt vector.  
Level 3 (= interrupt disable*)  
High  
1
1
These two bits are set/cleared by hardware when  
entering in interrupt. The loaded value is given by  
the corresponding bits in the interrupt software pri-  
ority registers (ISPRx).  
– Each interrupt vector (except RESET and TRAP)  
has corresponding bits in these registers where  
its own software priority is stored. This corre-  
spondance is shown in the following table.  
They can be also set/cleared by software with the  
RIM, SIM, HALT, WFI, IRET and PUSH/POP in-  
structions (see “Interrupt Dedicated Instruction  
Set” table).  
Vector address  
ISPRx bits  
FFFBh-FFFAh  
FFF9h-FFF8h  
...  
I1_0 and I0_0 bits*  
I1_1 and I0_1 bits  
...  
*Note:TRAP and RESET events can interrupt a  
level 3 program.  
FFE1h-FFE0h  
I1_13 and I0_13 bits  
– Each I1_x and I0_x bit value in the ISPRx regis-  
ters has the same meaning as the I1 and I0 bits  
in the CC register.  
– Level 0 can not be written (I1_x=1, I0_x=0). In  
this case, the previously stored value is kept. (ex-  
ample: previous=CFh, write=64h, result=44h)  
The RESET, and TRAP vectors have no software  
priorities. When one is serviced, the I1 and I0 bits  
of the CC register are both set.  
Caution: If the I1_x and I0_x bits are modified  
while the interrupt x is executed the following be-  
haviour has to be considered: If the interrupt x is  
still pending (new interrupt or flag not cleared) and  
the new software priority is higher than the previ-  
ous one, the interrupt x is re-entered. Otherwise,  
the software priority stays unchanged up to the  
next interrupt request (after the IRET of the inter-  
rupt x).  
26/140  
1
ST72323  
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)  
Table 5. Dedicated Interrupt Instruction Set  
Instruction  
New Description  
Entering Halt mode  
Function/Example  
I1  
H
I0  
N
Z
C
HALT  
IRET  
JRM  
1
0
Interrupt routine return  
Jump if I1:0=11 (level 3)  
Jump if I1:0<>11  
Pop CC, A, X, PC  
I1:0=11 ?  
I1  
H
I0  
N
Z
C
JRNM  
POP CC  
RIM  
I1:0<>11 ?  
Pop CC from the Stack  
Enable interrupt (level 0 set)  
Disable interrupt (level 3 set)  
Software trap  
Mem => CC  
I1  
1
H
I0  
0
1
1
0
N
Z
C
Load 10 in I1:0 of CC  
Load 11 in I1:0 of CC  
Software NMI  
SIM  
1
TRAP  
WFI  
1
Wait for interrupt  
1
Note: During the execution of an interrupt routine, the HALT, POPCC, RIM, SIM and WFI instructions change the current  
software priority up to the next IRET instruction or one of the previously mentioned instructions.  
27/140  
1
ST72323  
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)  
Table 6. Interrupt Mapping  
Exit  
from  
HALT/  
ACTIVE  
HALT  
Source  
Block  
Register Priority  
Address  
Vector  
N°  
Description  
Label  
Order  
RESET  
TRAP  
Reset  
Software interrupt  
Not used  
yes  
no  
FFFEh-FFFFh  
FFFCh-FFFDh  
FFFAh-FFFBh  
FFF8h-FFF9h  
FFF6h-FFF7h  
FFF4h-FFF5h  
FFF2h-FFF3h  
FFF0h-FFF1h  
FFEEh-FFEFh  
FFECh-FFEDh  
FFEAh-FFEBh  
FFE8h-FFE9h  
FFE6h-FFE7h  
FFE4h-FFE5h  
N/A  
MCCSR  
N/A  
0
1
MCC/RTC  
Main clock controller time base interrupt  
External interrupt port A3..0  
External interrupt port F2..0  
External interrupt port B3..0  
External interrupt port B7..4  
Not used  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
Higher  
Priority  
2
ei0  
ei1  
ei2  
ei3  
3
4
5
6
7
SPI  
SPI peripheral interrupts  
TIMER A peripheral interrupts  
TIMER B peripheral interrupts  
Not used  
SPICSR  
TASR  
yes  
no  
8
TIMER A  
TIMER B  
9
TBSR  
no  
10  
11  
Lower  
Priority  
Not used  
6.6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS  
6.6.1 I/O Port Interrupt Sensitivity  
Falling edge and low level  
Rising edge and high level (only for ei0 and ei2)  
The external interrupt sensitivity is controlled by  
the IPA, IPB and ISxx bits of the EICR register  
(Figure 17). This control allows to have up to 4 fully  
independent external interrupt source sensitivities.  
To guarantee correct functionality, the sensitivity  
bits in the EICR register can be modified only  
when the I1 and I0 bits of the CC register are both  
set to 1 (level 3). This means that interrupts must  
be disabled before changing sensitivity.  
Each external interrupt source can be generated  
on four (or five) different events on the pin:  
Falling edge  
Rising edge  
Falling and rising edge  
The pending interrupts are cleared by writing a dif-  
ferent value in the ISx[1:0], IPA or IPB bits of the  
EICR.  
28/140  
1
ST72323  
Figure 17. External Interrupt Control bits  
EICR  
IS20 IS21  
PORT A3 INTERRUPT  
PAOR.3  
PADDR.3  
ei0 INTERRUPT SOURCE  
SENSITIVITY  
CONTROL  
PA3  
IPA BIT  
EICR  
PORT F [2:0] INTERRUPTS  
IS20  
IS21  
PFOR.2  
PFDDR.2  
SENSITIVITY  
CONTROL  
PF2  
PF1  
PF0  
ei1 INTERRUPT SOURCE  
PF2  
EICR  
PORT B [3:0] INTERRUPTS  
IS10  
IS11  
PBOR.3  
PBDDR.3  
SENSITIVITY  
CONTROL  
PB3  
PB2  
PB1  
PB0  
PB3  
ei2 INTERRUPT SOURCE  
IPB BIT  
EICR  
PORT B4 INTERRUPT  
IS10  
IS11  
PBOR.4  
PBDDR.4  
SENSITIVITY  
CONTROL  
ei3 INTERRUPT SOURCE  
PB4  
29/140  
1
ST72323  
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)  
6.7 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER (EICR)  
Read/Write  
Bit 4:3 = IS2[1:0] ei0 and ei1 sensitivity  
The interrupt sensitivity, defined using the IS2[1:0]  
bits, is applied to the following external interrupts:  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
0
IS11 IS10 IPB IS21 IS20 IPA  
0
- ei0 (port A3..0)  
Bit 7:6 = IS1[1:0] ei2 and ei3 sensitivity  
The interrupt sensitivity, defined using the IS1[1:0]  
bits, is applied to the following external interrupts:  
- ei2 (port B3..0)  
External Interrupt Sensitivity  
IS21 IS20  
IPA bit =0  
IPA bit =1  
Falling edge &  
low level  
Rising edge  
& high level  
0
0
External Interrupt Sensitivity  
IS11 IS10  
0
1
1
1
0
1
Rising edge only  
Falling edge only  
Falling edge only  
Rising edge only  
IPB bit =0  
IPB bit =1  
Falling edge &  
low level  
Rising edge  
& high level  
0
0
Rising and falling edge  
0
1
1
1
0
1
Rising edge only  
Falling edge only  
Falling edge only  
Rising edge only  
- ei1 (port F2..0)  
Rising and falling edge  
IS21 IS20  
External Interrupt Sensitivity  
- ei3 (port B4)  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Falling edge & low level  
Rising edge only  
IS11 IS10  
External Interrupt Sensitivity  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Falling edge & low level  
Rising edge only  
Falling edge only  
Rising and falling edge  
Falling edge only  
These 2 bits can be written only when I1 and I0 of  
the CC register are both set to 1 (level 3).  
Rising and falling edge  
These 2 bits can be written only when I1 and I0 of  
the CC register are both set to 1 (level 3).  
Bit 2 = IPA Interrupt polarity for port A  
This bit is used to invert the sensitivity of the port A  
[3:0] external interrupts. It can be set and cleared  
by software only when I1 and I0 of the CC register  
are both set to 1 (level 3).  
Bit 5 = IPB Interrupt polarity for port B  
This bit is used to invert the sensitivity of the port B  
[3:0] external interrupts. It can be set and cleared  
by software only when I1 and I0 of the CC register  
are both set to 1 (level 3).  
0: No sensitivity inversion  
1: Sensitivity inversion  
0: No sensitivity inversion  
1: Sensitivity inversion  
Bits 1:0 = Reserved, must always be kept cleared.  
30/140  
1
ST72323  
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)  
Table 7. Nested Interrupts Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ei1  
ei0  
MCC  
ei3  
0024h  
0025h  
0026h  
I1_3  
1
I0_3  
1
I1_2  
1
I0_2  
1
I1_1  
1
I0_1  
1
ISPR0  
Reset Value  
1
1
SPI  
ei2  
I1_7  
1
I0_7  
1
I1_6  
1
I0_6  
1
I1_5  
1
I0_5  
1
I1_4  
1
I0_4  
1
ISPR1  
Reset Value  
TIMER B  
TIMER A  
I1_11  
1
I0_11  
1
I1_10  
1
I0_10  
1
I1_9  
1
I0_9  
1
I1_8  
1
I0_8  
1
ISPR2  
Reset Value  
0027h  
0028h  
I1_13  
1
I0_13  
1
I1_12  
1
I0_12  
1
ISPR3  
Reset Value  
1
1
1
1
EICR  
Reset Value  
IS11  
0
IS10  
0
IPB  
0
IS21  
0
IS20  
0
IPA  
0
0
0
31/140  
1
ST72323  
7 POWER SAVING MODES  
7.1 INTRODUCTION  
7.2 SLOW MODE  
To give a large measure of flexibility to the applica-  
tion in terms of power consumption, four main  
power saving modes are implemented in the ST7  
(see Figure 18): SLOW, WAIT (SLOW WAIT), AC-  
TIVE HALT and HALT.  
This mode has two targets:  
– To reduce power consumption by decreasing the  
internal clock in the device,  
– To adapt the internal clock frequency (f  
the available supply voltage.  
) to  
CPU  
After a RESET the normal operating mode is se-  
lected by default (RUN mode). This mode drives  
the device (CPU and embedded peripherals) by  
means of a master clock which is based on the  
main oscillator frequency divided or multiplied by 2  
SLOW mode is controlled by three bits in the  
MCCSR register: the SMS bit which enables or  
disables Slow mode and two CPx bits which select  
the internal slow frequency (f  
).  
CPU  
(f  
).  
In this mode, the master clock frequency (f  
)
OSC2  
OSC2  
can be divided by 2, 4, 8 or 16. The CPU and pe-  
ripherals are clocked at this lower frequency  
CPU  
From RUN mode, the different power saving  
modes may be selected by setting the relevant  
register bits or by calling the specific ST7 software  
instruction whose action depends on the oscillator  
status.  
(f  
).  
Note: SLOW-WAIT mode is activated when enter-  
ing the WAIT mode while the device is already in  
SLOW mode.  
Figure 18. Power Saving Mode Transitions  
Figure 19. SLOW Mode Clock Transitions  
High  
RUN  
f
/2  
f
/4  
f
OSC2  
OSC2  
OSC2  
f
CPU  
f
OSC2  
SLOW  
WAIT  
00  
01  
CP1:0  
SMS  
SLOW WAIT  
ACTIVE HALT  
HALT  
NORMAL RUN MODE  
REQUEST  
NEW SLOW  
FREQUENCY  
REQUEST  
Low  
POWER CONSUMPTION  
32/140  
1
ST72323  
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont’d)  
7.3 WAIT MODE  
Figure 20. WAIT Mode Flow-chart  
WAIT mode places the MCU in a low power con-  
sumption mode by stopping the CPU.  
This power saving mode is selected by calling the  
‘WFI’ instruction.  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
I[1:0] BITS  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
10  
WFI INSTRUCTION  
All peripherals remain active. During WAIT mode,  
the I[1:0] bits of the CC register are forced to ‘10’,  
to enable all interrupts. All other registers and  
memory remain unchanged. The MCU remains in  
WAIT mode until an interrupt or RESET occurs,  
whereupon the Program Counter branches to the  
starting address of the interrupt or Reset service  
routine.  
N
RESET  
Y
N
INTERRUPT  
The MCU will remain in WAIT mode until a Reset  
or an Interrupt occurs, causing it to wake up.  
Y
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
I[1:0] BITS  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
10  
Refer to Figure 20.  
256 OR 4096 CPU CLOCK  
CYCLE DELAY  
OSCILLATOR  
ON  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
I[1:0] BITS  
ON  
ON  
XX 1)  
FETCH RESET VECTOR  
OR SERVICE INTERRUPT  
Note:  
1. Before servicing an interrupt, the CC register is  
pushed on the stack. The I[1:0] bits of the CC reg-  
ister are set to the current software priority level of  
the interrupt routine and recovered when the CC  
register is popped.  
33/140  
1
ST72323  
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont’d)  
7.4 ACTIVE-HALT AND HALT MODES  
pending on option byte). Otherwise, the ST7 en-  
ters HALT mode for the remaining t period.  
DELAY  
ACTIVE-HALT and HALT modes are the two low-  
est power consumption modes of the MCU. They  
are both entered by executing the ‘HALT’ instruc-  
tion. The decision to enter either in ACTIVE-HALT  
or HALT mode is given by the MCC/RTC interrupt  
enable flag (OIE bit in MCCSR register).  
Figure 21. ACTIVE-HALT Timing Overview  
ACTIVE  
HALT  
256 OR 4096 CPU  
CYCLE DELAY  
RUN  
RUN  
1)  
RESET  
OR  
INTERRUPT  
MCCSR Power Saving Mode entered when HALT  
HALT  
INSTRUCTION  
[MCCSR.OIE=1]  
OIE bit  
instruction is executed  
HALT mode  
ACTIVE-HALT mode  
FETCH  
VECTOR  
0
1
Figure 22. ACTIVE-HALT Mode Flow-chart  
7.4.1 ACTIVE-HALT MODE  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
10  
2)  
HALT INSTRUCTION  
(MCCSR.OIE=1)  
ACTIVE-HALT mode is the lowest power con-  
sumption mode of the MCU with a real time clock  
available. It is entered by executing the ‘HALT’ in-  
struction when the OIE bit of the Main Clock Con-  
troller Status register (MCCSR) is set (see Section  
9.2 on page 48 for more details on the MCCSR  
register).  
I[1:0] BITS  
N
RESET  
Y
N
3)  
INTERRUPT  
Y
The MCU can exit ACTIVE-HALT mode on recep-  
tion of either an MCC/RTC interrupt, a specific in-  
terrupt (see Table 6, “Interrupt Mapping,” on  
page 28) or a RESET. When exiting ACTIVE-  
HALT mode by means of an interrupt, no 256 or  
4096 CPU cycle delay occurs. The CPU resumes  
operation by servicing the interrupt or by fetching  
the reset vector which woke it up (see Figure 22).  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
4)  
I[1:0] BITS  
XX  
256 OR 4096 CPU CLOCK  
CYCLE DELAY  
When entering ACTIVE-HALT mode, the I[1:0] bits  
in the CC register are forced to ‘10b’ to enable in-  
terrupts. Therefore, if an interrupt is pending, the  
MCU wakes up immediately.  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
ON  
ON  
ON  
4)  
I[1:0] BITS  
XX  
In ACTIVE-HALT mode, only the main oscillator  
and its associated counter (MCC/RTC) are run-  
ning to keep a wake-up time base. All other periph-  
erals are not clocked except those which get their  
clock supply from another clock generator (such  
as external or auxiliary oscillator).  
FETCH RESET VECTOR  
OR SERVICE INTERRUPT  
Notes:  
1. This delay occurs only if the MCU exits ACTIVE-  
HALT mode by means of a RESET.  
2. Peripheral clocked with an external clock source  
can still be active.  
3. Only the MCC/RTC interrupt and some specific  
interrupts can exit the MCU from ACTIVE-HALT  
mode (such as external interrupt). Refer to  
Table 6, “Interrupt Mapping,” on page 28 for more  
details.  
4. Before servicing an interrupt, the CC register is  
pushed on the stack. The I[1:0] bits of the CC reg-  
ister are set to the current software priority level of  
the interrupt routine and restored when the CC  
register is popped.  
The safeguard against staying locked in ACTIVE-  
HALT mode is provided by the oscillator interrupt.  
Note: As soon as the interrupt capability of one of  
the oscillators is selected (MCCSR.OIE bit set),  
entering ACTIVE-HALT mode while the Watchdog  
is active does not generate a RESET.  
This means that the device cannot spend more  
than a defined delay in this power saving mode.  
CAUTION: When exiting ACTIVE-HALT mode fol-  
lowing an interrupt, OIE bit of MCCSR register  
must not be cleared before t  
after the inter-  
CPU  
DELAY  
rupt occurs (t  
= 256 or 4096 t  
delay de-  
DELAY  
34/140  
1
ST72323  
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont’d)  
7.4.2 HALT MODE  
Figure 24. HALT Mode Flow-chart  
The HALT mode is the lowest power consumption  
mode of the MCU. It is entered by executing the  
‘HALT’ instruction when the OIE bit of the Main  
Clock Controller Status register (MCCSR) is  
cleared (see Section 9.2 on page 48 for more de-  
tails on the MCCSR register).  
HALT INSTRUCTION  
(MCCSR.OIE=0)  
ENABLE  
WATCHDOG  
0
DISABLE  
WDGHALT 1)  
The MCU can exit HALT mode on reception of ei-  
ther a specific interrupt (see Table 6, “Interrupt  
Mapping,” on page 28) or a RESET. When exiting  
HALT mode by means of a RESET or an interrupt,  
the oscillator is immediately turned on and the 256  
or 4096 CPU cycle delay is used to stabilize the  
oscillator. After the start up delay, the CPU  
resumes operation by servicing the interrupt or by  
fetching the reset vector which woke it up (see Fig-  
ure 24).  
When entering HALT mode, the I[1:0] bits in the  
CC register are forced to ‘10b’to enable interrupts.  
Therefore, if an interrupt is pending, the MCU  
wakes up immediately.  
1
WATCHDOG  
RESET  
OSCILLATOR  
OFF  
PERIPHERALS 2)  
CPU  
OFF  
OFF  
10  
I[1:0] BITS  
N
RESET  
Y
N
INTERRUPT 3)  
In HALT mode, the main oscillator is turned off  
causing all internal processing to be stopped, in-  
cluding the operation of the on-chip peripherals.  
All peripherals are not clocked except the ones  
which get their clock supply from another clock  
generator (such as an external or auxiliary oscilla-  
tor).  
Y
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
I[1:0] BITS  
XX 4)  
256 OR 4096 CPU CLOCK  
CYCLE DELAY  
The compatibility of Watchdog operation with  
HALT mode is configured by the “WDGHALT” op-  
tion bit of the option byte. The HALT instruction  
when executed while the Watchdog system is en-  
abled, can generate a Watchdog RESET (see  
Section 13.1 on page 125) for more details.  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
ON  
ON  
ON  
I[1:0] BITS  
XX 4)  
Figure 23. HALT Timing Overview  
FETCH RESET VECTOR  
OR SERVICE INTERRUPT  
256 OR 4096 CPU  
CYCLE DELAY  
RUN  
HALT  
RUN  
Notes:  
RESET  
OR  
INTERRUPT  
1. WDGHALT is an option bit. See option byte sec-  
tion for more details.  
HALT  
INSTRUCTION  
[MCCSR.OIE=0]  
2. Peripheral clocked with an external clock source  
can still be active.  
FETCH  
VECTOR  
3. Only some specific interrupts can exit the MCU  
from HALT mode (such as external interrupt). Re-  
fer to Table 6, “Interrupt Mapping,” on page 28 for  
more details.  
4. Before servicing an interrupt, the CC register is  
pushed on the stack. The I[1:0] bits of the CC reg-  
ister are set to the current software priority level of  
the interrupt routine and recovered when the CC  
register is popped.  
35/140  
1
ST72323  
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont’d)  
7.4.2.1 Halt Mode Recommendations  
– The opcode for the HALT instruction is 0x8E. To  
avoid an unexpected HALT instruction due to a  
program counter failure, it is advised to clear all  
occurrences of the data value 0x8E from memo-  
ry. For example, avoid defining a constant in  
ROM with the value 0x8E.  
– Make sure that an external event is available to  
wake up the microcontroller from Halt mode.  
– When using an external interrupt to wake up the  
microcontroller, reinitialize the corresponding I/O  
as “Input Pull-up with Interrupt” before executing  
the HALT instruction. The main reason for this is  
that the I/O may be wrongly configured due to ex-  
ternal interference or by an unforeseen logical  
condition.  
– As the HALT instruction clears the interrupt mask  
in the CC register to allow interrupts, the user  
may choose to clear all pending interrupt bits be-  
fore executing the HALT instruction. This avoids  
entering other peripheral interrupt routines after  
executing the external interrupt routine corre-  
sponding to the wake-up event (reset or external  
interrupt).  
– For the same reason, reinitialize the level sensi-  
tiveness of each external interrupt as a precau-  
tionary measure.  
36/140  
1
ST72323  
8 I/O PORTS  
8.1 INTRODUCTION  
Each pin can independently generate an interrupt  
request. The interrupt sensitivity is independently  
programmable using the sensitivity bits in the  
EICR register.  
The I/O ports offer different functional modes:  
– transfer of data through digital inputs and outputs  
and for specific pins:  
Each external interrupt vector is linked to a dedi-  
cated group of I/O port pins (see pinout description  
and interrupt section). If several input pins are se-  
lected simultaneously as interrupt sources, these  
are first detected according to the sensitivity bits in  
the EICR register and then logically ORed.  
– external interrupt generation  
– alternate signal input/output for the on-chip pe-  
ripherals.  
An I/O port contains up to 8 pins. Each pin can be  
programmed independently as digital input (with or  
without interrupt generation) or digital output.  
The external interrupts are hardware interrupts,  
which means that the request latch (not accessible  
directly by the application) is automatically cleared  
when the corresponding interrupt vector is  
fetched. To clear an unwanted pending interrupt  
by software, the sensitivity bits in the EICR register  
must be modified.  
8.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
Each port has 2 main registers:  
– Data Register (DR)  
– Data Direction Register (DDR)  
and one optional register:  
– Option Register (OR)  
8.2.2 Output Modes  
The output configuration is selected by setting the  
corresponding DDR register bit. In this case, writ-  
ing the DR register applies this digital value to the  
I/O pin through the latch. Then reading the DR reg-  
ister returns the previously stored value.  
Each I/O pin may be programmed using the corre-  
sponding register bits in the DDR and OR regis-  
ters: bit X corresponding to pin X of the port. The  
same correspondence is used for the DR register.  
Two different output modes can be selected by  
software through the OR register: Output push-pull  
and open-drain.  
The following description takes into account the  
OR register, (for specific ports which do not pro-  
vide this register refer to the I/O Port Implementa-  
tion section). The generic I/O block diagram is  
shown in Figure 25  
DR register value and output pin status:  
DR  
0
Push-pull  
Open-drain  
Vss  
V
8.2.1 Input Modes  
SS  
1
V
Floating  
DD  
The input configuration is selected by clearing the  
corresponding DDR register bit.  
8.2.3 Alternate Functions  
In this case, reading the DR register returns the  
digital value applied to the external I/O pin.  
When an on-chip peripheral is configured to use a  
pin, the alternate function is automatically select-  
ed. This alternate function takes priority over the  
standard I/O programming.  
Different input modes can be selected by software  
through the OR register.  
Notes:  
When the signal is coming from an on-chip periph-  
eral, the I/O pin is automatically configured in out-  
put mode (push-pull or open drain according to the  
peripheral).  
1. Writing the DR register modifies the latch value  
but does not affect the pin status.  
2. When switching from input to output mode, the  
DR register has to be written first to drive the cor-  
rect level on the pin as soon as the port is config-  
ured as an output.  
When the signal is going to an on-chip peripheral,  
the I/O pin must be configured in input mode. In  
this case, the pin state is also digitally readable by  
addressing the DR register.  
3. Do not use read/modify/write instructions (BSET  
or BRES) to modify the DR register  
External interrupt function  
Note: Input pull-up configuration can cause unex-  
pected value at the input of the alternate peripheral  
input. When an on-chip peripheral use a pin as in-  
put and output, this pin has to be configured in in-  
put floating mode.  
When an I/O is configured as Input with Interrupt,  
an event on this I/O can generate an external inter-  
rupt request to the CPU.  
37/140  
1
ST72323  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
Figure 25. I/O Port General Block Diagram  
ALTERNATE  
OUTPUT  
1
0
REGISTER  
ACCESS  
P-BUFFER  
(see table below)  
V
DD  
ALTERNATE  
ENABLE  
PULL-UP  
(see table below)  
DR  
DDR  
OR  
V
DD  
PULL-UP  
CONDITION  
PAD  
If implemented  
OR SEL  
DDR SEL  
DR SEL  
N-BUFFER  
DIODES  
(see table below)  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
CMOS  
SCHMITT  
TRIGGER  
1
0
ALTERNATE  
INPUT  
EXTERNAL  
INTERRUPT  
SOURCE (ei )  
x
Table 8. I/O Port Mode Options  
Configuration Mode  
Diodes  
Pull-Up  
P-Buffer  
to V  
to V  
SS  
DD  
Floating with/without Interrupt  
Input  
Off  
On  
Off  
Pull-up with/without Interrupt  
On  
Push-pull  
On  
Off  
NI  
On  
Off  
NI  
Output  
Open Drain (logic level)  
True Open Drain  
NI (see note)  
Legend: NI - not implemented  
Off - implemented not activated  
On - implemented and activated  
Note: The diode to V is not implemented in the  
DD  
true open drain pads. A local protection between  
the pad and V is implemented to protect the de-  
SS  
vice against positive stress.  
38/140  
1
ST72323  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
Table 9. I/O Port Configurations  
Hardware Configuration  
DR REGISTER ACCESS  
NOT IMPLEMENTED IN  
TRUE OPEN DRAIN  
I/O PORTS  
V
DD  
PULL-UP  
CONDITION  
R
W
R
PU  
DR  
REGISTER  
DATA BUS  
PAD  
ALTERNATE INPUT  
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT  
SOURCE (ei )  
x
INTERRUPT  
CONDITION  
ANALOG INPUT  
NOT IMPLEMENTED IN  
TRUE OPEN DRAIN  
I/O PORTS  
DR REGISTER ACCESS  
V
DD  
R
PU  
R/W  
DR  
REGISTER  
DATA BUS  
PAD  
ALTERNATE  
ENABLE  
ALTERNATE  
OUTPUT  
NOT IMPLEMENTED IN  
TRUE OPEN DRAIN  
I/O PORTS  
DR REGISTER ACCESS  
V
DD  
R
PU  
R/W  
DR  
REGISTER  
DATA BUS  
PAD  
ALTERNATE  
ENABLE  
ALTERNATE  
OUTPUT  
Notes:  
1. When the I/O port is in input configuration and the associated alternate function is enabled as an output,  
reading the DR register will read the alternate function output status.  
2. When the I/O port is in output configuration and the associated alternate function is enabled as an input,  
the alternate function reads the pin status given by the DR register content.  
39/140  
1
ST72323  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
CAUTION: The alternate function must not be ac-  
tivated as long as the pin is configured as input  
with interrupt, in order to avoid generating spurious  
interrupts.  
Figure 26. Interrupt I/O Port State Transitions  
01  
00  
10  
11  
Analog alternate function  
INPUT  
floating/pull-up  
interrupt  
INPUT  
floating  
(reset state)  
OUTPUT  
open-drain  
OUTPUT  
push-pull  
When the pin is used as an ADC input, the I/O  
must be configured as floating input. The analog  
multiplexer (controlled by the ADC registers)  
switches the analog voltage present on the select-  
ed pin to the common analog rail which is connect-  
ed to the ADC input.  
= DDR, OR  
XX  
8.4 LOW POWER MODES  
It is recommended not to change the voltage level  
or loading on any port pin while conversion is in  
progress. Furthermore it is recommended not to  
have clocking pins located close to a selected an-  
alog pin.  
Mode  
WAIT  
HALT  
Description  
No effect on I/O ports. External interrupts  
cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.  
No effect on I/O ports. External interrupts  
cause the device to exit from HALT mode.  
WARNING: The analog input voltage level must  
be within the limits stated in the absolute maxi-  
mum ratings.  
8.5 INTERRUPTS  
8.3 I/O PORT IMPLEMENTATION  
The external interrupt event generates an interrupt  
if the corresponding configuration is selected with  
DDR and OR registers and the interrupt mask in  
the CC register is not active (RIM instruction).  
The hardware implementation on each I/O port de-  
pends on the settings in the DDR and OR registers  
and specific feature of the I/O port such as ADC In-  
put or true open drain.  
Enable Exit  
Control from  
Exit  
from  
Halt  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
Switching these I/O ports from one state to anoth-  
er should be done in a sequence that prevents un-  
wanted side effects. Recommended safe transi-  
tions are illustrated in Figure 26 Other transitions  
are potentially risky and should be avoided, since  
they are likely to present unwanted side-effects  
such as spurious interrupt generation.  
Bit  
Wait  
External interrupt on  
selected external  
event  
DDRx  
ORx  
-
Yes  
Yes  
40/140  
1
ST72323  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
8.5.1 I/O Port Implementation  
The I/O port register configurations are summa-  
rised as follows.  
PA3, PB3, PF2 (without pull-up)  
MODE  
floating input  
DDR  
OR  
0
Standard Ports  
0
0
1
1
floating interrupt input  
open drain output  
push-pull output  
1
PA5:4, PC7:0, PD5:0,  
PE1:0, PF7:6, 4  
0
1
MODE  
DDR  
OR  
0
floating input  
pull-up input  
0
0
1
1
1
True Open Drain Ports  
PA7:6  
open drain output  
push-pull output  
0
1
MODE  
floating input  
DDR  
0
1
Interrupt Ports  
open drain (high sink ports)  
PB4, PB2:0, PF1:0 (with pull-up)  
MODE  
floating input  
DDR  
OR  
0
0
0
1
1
pull-up interrupt input  
open drain output  
push-pull output  
1
0
1
Table 10. Port Configuration  
Input  
floating  
Output  
Port  
Port A  
Port B  
Pin name  
PA7:6  
OR = 0  
OR = 1  
OR = 0  
OR = 1  
true open-drain  
PA5:4  
PA3  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
pull-up  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
floating interrupt  
floating interrupt  
pull-up interrupt  
pull-up  
PB3  
PB4, PB2:0  
PC7:0  
PD5:0  
PE1:0  
PF7:6, 4  
PF2  
Port C  
Port D  
Port E  
pull-up  
pull-up  
pull-up  
Port F  
floating interrupt  
pull-up interrupt  
PF1:0  
41/140  
1
ST72323  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
Table 11. I/O Port Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reset Value  
of all I/O port registers  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0000h  
0001h  
0002h  
0003h  
0004h  
0005h  
0006h  
0007h  
0008h  
0009h  
000Ah  
000Bh  
000Ch  
000Dh  
000Eh  
000Fh  
0010h  
0011h  
PADR  
PADDR  
PAOR  
PBDR  
PBDDR  
PBOR  
PCDR  
PCDDR  
PCOR  
PDDR  
PDDDR  
PDOR  
PEDR  
MSB  
MSB  
MSB  
MSB  
MSB  
MSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
PEDDR  
PEOR  
PFDR  
PFDDR  
PFOR  
42/140  
1
ST72323  
9 ON-CHIP PERIPHERALS  
9.1 WATCHDOG TIMER (WDG)  
9.1.1 Introduction  
If the watchdog is activated (the WDGA bit is set)  
and when the 7-bit timer (bits T[6:0]) rolls over  
from 40h to 3Fh (T6 becomes cleared), it initiates  
a reset cycle pulling low the reset pin for typically  
500ns.  
The Watchdog timer is used to detect the occur-  
rence of a software fault, usually generated by ex-  
ternal interference or by unforeseen logical condi-  
tions, which causes the application program to  
abandon its normal sequence. The Watchdog cir-  
cuit generates an MCU reset on expiry of a pro-  
grammed time period, unless the program refresh-  
es the counter’s contents before the T6 bit be-  
comes cleared.  
The application program must write in the  
WDGCR register at regular intervals during normal  
operation to prevent an MCU reset. This down-  
counter is free-running: it counts down even if the  
watchdog is disabled. The value to be stored in the  
WDGCR register must be between FFh and C0h:  
9.1.2 Main Features  
Programmable free-running downcounter  
Programmable reset  
– The WDGA bit is set (watchdog enabled)  
– The T6 bit is set to prevent generating an imme-  
diate reset  
Reset (if watchdog activated) when the T6 bit  
– The T[5:0] bits contain the number of increments  
which represents the time delay before the  
watchdog produces a reset (see Figure 28. Ap-  
proximate Timeout Duration). The timing varies  
between a minimum and a maximum value due  
to the unknown status of the prescaler when writ-  
ing to the WDGCR register (see Figure 29).  
reaches zero  
Optional  
reset  
on  
HALT  
instruction  
(configurable by option byte)  
Hardware Watchdog selectable by option byte  
9.1.3 Functional Description  
Following a reset, the watchdog is disabled. Once  
activated it cannot be disabled, except by a reset.  
The counter value stored in the Watchdog Control  
register (WDGCR bits T[6:0]), is decremented  
every 16384 f  
cycles (approx.), and the  
The T6 bit can be used to generate a software re-  
set (the WDGA bit is set and the T6 bit is cleared).  
OSC2  
length of the timeout period can be programmed  
by the user in 64 increments.  
If the watchdog is activated, the HALT instruction  
will generate a Reset.  
Figure 27. Watchdog Block Diagram  
RESET  
f
OSC2  
MCC/RTC  
WATCHDOG CONTROL REGISTER (WDGCR)  
T5  
DIV 64  
WDGA T6  
T1  
T0  
T4  
T2  
T3  
6-BIT DOWNCOUNTER (CNT)  
12-BIT MCC  
RTC COUNTER  
WDG PRESCALER  
DIV 4  
TB[1:0] bits  
(MCCSR  
Register)  
MSB  
LSB  
0
6 5  
11  
43/140  
1
ST72323  
WATCHDOG TIMER (Cont’d)  
9.1.4 How to Program the Watchdog Timeout  
more precision is needed, use the formulae in Fig-  
ure 29.  
Figure 28 shows the linear relationship between  
the 6-bit value to be loaded in the Watchdog Coun-  
ter (CNT) and the resulting timeout duration in mil-  
liseconds. This can be used for a quick calculation  
without taking the timing variations into account. If  
Caution: When writing to the WDGCR register, al-  
ways write 1 in the T6 bit to avoid generating an  
immediate reset.  
Figure 28. Approximate Timeout Duration  
3F  
38  
30  
28  
20  
18  
10  
08  
00  
1.5  
18  
34  
50  
65  
82  
98  
114  
128  
Watchdog timeout (ms) @ 8 MHz. f  
OSC2  
44/140  
1
ST72323  
WATCHDOG TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 29. Exact Timeout Duration (t  
and t  
)
max  
min  
WHERE:  
t
t
t
= (LSB + 128) x 64 x t  
min0  
OSC2  
= 16384 x t  
= 125ns if f  
max0  
OSC2  
OSC2  
=8 MHz  
OSC2  
CNT = Value of T[5:0] bits in the WDGCR register (6 bits)  
MSB and LSB are values from the table below depending on the timebase selected by the TB[1:0] bits  
in the MCCSR register  
TB1 Bit  
TB0 Bit  
Selected MCCSR  
Timebase  
MSB  
LSB  
(MCCSR Reg.) (MCCSR Reg.)  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
2ms  
4ms  
4
8
59  
53  
35  
54  
10ms  
25ms  
20  
49  
To calculate the minimum Watchdog Timeout (t ):  
min  
MSB  
4
IF  
THEN  
ELSE  
-------------  
CNT <  
t
= t  
+ 16384 × CNT × t  
min  
min0  
osc2  
4CNT  
----------------  
4CNT  
----------------  
t
= t  
+ 16384 × CNT –  
+ (192 + LSB) × 64 ×  
× t  
osc2  
min  
min0  
MSB  
MSB  
To calculate the maximum Watchdog Timeout (t  
):  
max  
MSB  
4
IF  
-------------  
THEN  
ELSE  
CNT ≤  
t
= t  
+ 16384 × CNT × t  
max  
max0  
osc2  
4CNT  
----------------  
4CNT  
----------------  
t
= t  
+ 16384 × CNT –  
+ (192 + LSB) × 64 ×  
× t  
osc2  
max  
max0  
MSB  
MSB  
Note: In the above formulae, division results must be rounded down to the next integer value.  
Example:  
With 2ms timeout selected in MCCSR register  
Min. Watchdog  
Timeout (ms)  
Max. Watchdog  
Timeout (ms)  
Value of T[5:0] Bits in  
WDGCR Register (Hex.)  
t
t
min  
max  
00  
3F  
1.496  
128  
2.048  
128.552  
45/140  
1
ST72323  
WATCHDOG TIMER (Cont’d)  
9.1.5 Low Power Modes  
Mode Description  
SLOW No effect on Watchdog.  
WAIT No effect on Watchdog.  
OIE bit in  
MCCSR  
register  
WDGHALT bit  
in Option  
Byte  
No Watchdog reset is generated. The MCU enters Halt mode. The Watch-  
dog counter is decremented once and then stops counting and is no longer  
able to generate a watchdog reset until the MCU receives an external inter-  
rupt or a reset.  
0
0
If an external interrupt is received, the Watchdog restarts counting after 256  
or 4096 CPU clocks. If a reset is generated, the Watchdog is disabled (reset  
state) unless Hardware Watchdog is selected by option byte. For applica-  
tion recommendations see Section 9.1.7 below.  
HALT  
0
1
1
x
A reset is generated.  
No reset is generated. The MCU enters Active Halt mode. The Watchdog  
counter is not decremented. It stop counting. When the MCU receives an  
oscillator interrupt or external interrupt, the Watchdog restarts counting im-  
mediately. When the MCU receives a reset the Watchdog restarts counting  
after 256 or 4096 CPU clocks.  
9.1.6 Hardware Watchdog Option  
9.1.9 Register Description  
If Hardware Watchdog is selected by option byte,  
the watchdog is always active and the WDGA bit in  
the WDGCR is not used. Refer to the Option Byte  
description.  
CONTROL REGISTER (WDGCR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0111 1111 (7Fh)  
9.1.7 Using Halt Mode with the WDG  
(WDGHALT option)  
7
0
WDGA T6  
T5  
T4  
T3  
T2  
T1  
T0  
The following recommendation applies if Halt  
mode is used when the watchdog is enabled.  
– Before executing the HALT instruction, refresh  
the WDG counter, to avoid an unexpected WDG  
reset immediately after waking up the microcon-  
troller.  
Bit 7 = WDGA Activation bit.  
This bit is set by software and only cleared by  
hardware after a reset. When WDGA = 1, the  
watchdog can generate a reset.  
0: Watchdog disabled  
1: Watchdog enabled  
9.1.8 Interrupts  
None.  
Note: This bit is not used if the hardware watch-  
dog option is enabled by option byte.  
Bit 6:0 = T[6:0] 7-bit counter (MSB to LSB).  
These bits contain the value of the watchdog  
counter. It is decremented every 16384 f  
cles (approx.). A reset is produced when it rolls  
over from 40h to 3Fh (T6 becomes cleared).  
cy-  
OSC2  
46/140  
1
ST72323  
Table 12. Watchdog Timer Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WDGCR  
Reset Value  
WDGA  
0
T6  
1
T5  
1
T4  
1
T3  
1
T2  
1
T1  
1
T0  
1
002Ah  
47/140  
1
ST72323  
9.2  
MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK AND BEEPER (MCC/RTC)  
The Main Clock Controller consists of three differ-  
ent functions:  
external devices. It is controlled by the MCO bit in  
the MCCSR register.  
CAUTION: When selected, the clock out pin sus-  
pends the clock during ACTIVE-HALT mode.  
a programmable CPU clock prescaler  
a clock-out signal to supply external devices  
9.2.3  
Real Time Clock Timer (RTC)  
a real time clock timer with interrupt capability  
The counter of the real time clock timer allows an  
interrupt to be generated based on an accurate  
real time clock. Four different time bases depend-  
Each function can be used independently and si-  
multaneously.  
9.2.1  
Programmable CPU Clock Prescaler  
ing directly on f  
are available. The whole  
OSC2  
functionality is controlled by four bits of the MCC-  
SR register: TB[1:0], OIE and OIF.  
The programmable CPU clock prescaler supplies  
the clock for the ST7 CPU and its internal periph-  
erals. It manages SLOW power saving mode (See  
Section 7.2 SLOW MODE for more details).  
When the RTC interrupt is enabled (OIE bit set),  
the ST7 enters ACTIVE-HALT mode when the  
HALT instruction is executed. See Section 7.4 AC-  
TIVE-HALT AND HALT MODES for more details.  
The prescaler selects the f  
main clock frequen-  
CPU  
cy and is controlled by three bits in the MCCSR  
register: CP[1:0] and SMS.  
9.2.4  
Beeper  
9.2.2  
Clock-out Capability  
The clock-out capability is an alternate function of  
an I/O port pin that outputs the f clock to drive  
The beep function is controlled by the MCCBCR  
register. It can output three selectable frequencies  
on the BEEP pin (I/O port alternate function).  
CPU  
Figure 30.  
Main Clock Controller (MCC/RTC) Block Diagram  
BC1 BC0  
MCCBCR  
BEEP  
MCO  
BEEP SIGNAL  
SELECTION  
12-BIT MCC RTC  
COUNTER  
TO  
DIV 64  
WATCHDOG  
TIMER  
MCO CP1 CP0 SMS TB1 TB0 OIE OIF  
MCCSR  
MCC/RTC INTERRUPT  
fCPU  
fOSC2  
DIV 2, 4, 8, 16  
1
0
CPU CLOCK  
TO CPU AND  
PERIPHERALS  
48/140  
1
ST72323  
MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK (Cont’d)  
9.2.5  
Low Power Modes  
Bit 6:5 = CP[1:0] CPU clock prescaler  
Mode  
Description  
These bits select the CPU clock prescaler which is  
applied in the different slow modes. Their action is  
conditioned by the setting of the SMS bit. These  
two bits are set and cleared by software  
No effect on MCC/RTC peripheral.  
MCC/RTC interrupt cause the device to exit  
from WAIT mode.  
WAIT  
No effect on MCC/RTC counter (OIE bit is  
f
in SLOW mode  
CP1  
CP0  
ACTIVE- set), the registers are frozen.  
CPU  
HALT  
MCC/RTC interrupt cause the device to exit  
from ACTIVE-HALT mode.  
f
f
f
/ 2  
/ 4  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
OSC2  
OSC2  
OSC2  
MCC/RTC counter and registers are frozen.  
MCC/RTC operation resumes when the  
MCU is woken up by an interrupt with “exit  
from HALT” capability.  
/ 8  
HALT  
f
/ 16  
OSC2  
9.2.6  
Bit 4 = SMS Slow mode select  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: Normal mode. f = f  
Interrupts  
The MCC/RTC interrupt event generates an inter-  
rupt if the OIE bit of the MCCSR register is set and  
the interrupt mask in the CC register is not active  
(RIM instruction).  
OSC2  
CPU  
1: Slow mode. f  
is given by CP1, CP0  
CPU  
See Section 7.2 SLOW MODE and Section 9.2  
MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME  
CLOCK AND BEEPER (MCC/RTC) for more de-  
tails.  
Enable Exit  
Control from  
Exit  
from  
Halt  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
Bit  
Wait  
Time base overflow  
event  
1)  
Bit 3:2 = TB[1:0] Time base control  
OIF  
OIE  
Yes  
No  
These bits select the programmable divider time  
base. They are set and cleared by software.  
Note:  
The MCC/RTC interrupt wakes up the MCU from  
ACTIVE-HALT mode, not from HALT mode.  
Time Base  
Counter  
TB1 TB0  
Prescaler  
f
=4MHz  
f
=8MHz  
OSC2  
OSC2  
16000  
32000  
80000  
200000  
4ms  
2ms  
4ms  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
8ms  
20ms  
50ms  
9.2.7  
Register Description  
10ms  
25ms  
MCC CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (MCCSR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h  
)
A modification of the time base is taken into ac-  
count at the end of the current period (previously  
set) to avoid an unwanted time shift. This allows to  
use this time base as a real time clock.  
7
0
MCO CP1 CP0 SMS TB1 TB0 OIE OIF  
Bit 1 = OIE Oscillator interrupt enable  
This bit set and cleared by software.  
0: Oscillator interrupt disabled  
Bit 7 = MCO Main clock out selection  
This bit enables the MCO alternate function on the  
PF0 I/O port. It is set and cleared by software.  
0: MCO alternate function disabled (I/O pin free for  
general-purpose I/O)  
1: Oscillator interrupt enabled  
This interrupt can be used to exit from ACTIVE-  
HALT mode.  
1: MCO alternate function enabled (f  
port)  
on I/O  
CPU  
When this bit is set, calling the ST7 software HALT  
instruction enters the ACTIVE-HALT power saving  
mode  
.
Note: To reduce power consumption, the MCO  
function is not active in ACTIVE-HALT mode.  
49/140  
1
ST72323  
MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK (Cont’d)  
MCC BEEP CONTROL REGISTER (MCCBCR)  
Bit 0 = OIF Oscillator interrupt flag  
This bit is set by hardware and cleared by software  
reading the MCCSR register. It indicates when set  
that the main oscillator has reached the selected  
elapsed time (TB1:0).  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
0: Timeout not reached  
1: Timeout reached  
0
0
0
0
0
0
BC1 BC0  
CAUTION: The BRES and BSET instructions  
must not be used on the MCCSR register to avoid  
unintentionally clearing the OIF bit.  
Bit 7:2 = Reserved, must be kept cleared.  
Bit 1:0 = BC[1:0] Beep control  
These 2 bits select the PF1 pin beep capability.  
BC1  
BC0  
Beep mode with f  
=8MHz  
OSC2  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Off  
~2-KHz  
Output  
Beep signal  
~50% duty cycle  
~1-KHz  
~500-Hz  
The beep output signal is available in ACTIVE-  
HALT mode but has to be disabled to reduce the  
consumption.  
Table 13. Main Clock Controller Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MCCSR  
Reset Value  
MCO  
0
CP1  
0
CP0  
0
SMS  
0
TB1  
0
TB0  
0
OIE  
0
OIF  
0
002Ch  
002Dh  
MCCBCR  
Reset Value  
BC1  
0
BC0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
50/140  
1
ST72323  
9.3 16-BIT TIMER  
9.3.1 Introduction  
When reading an input signal on a non-bonded  
pin, the value will always be ‘1’.  
The timer consists of a 16-bit free-running counter  
driven by a programmable prescaler.  
9.3.3 Functional Description  
9.3.3.1 Counter  
It may be used for a variety of purposes, including  
pulse length measurement of up to two input sig-  
nals (input capture) or generation of up to two out-  
put waveforms (output compare and PWM).  
The main block of the Programmable Timer is a  
16-bit free running upcounter and its associated  
16-bit registers. The 16-bit registers are made up  
of two 8-bit registers called high & low.  
Pulse lengths and waveform periods can be mod-  
ulated from a few microseconds to several milli-  
seconds using the timer prescaler and the CPU  
clock prescaler.  
Counter Register (CR):  
– Counter High Register (CHR) is the most sig-  
nificant byte (MS Byte).  
Some ST7 devices have two on-chip 16-bit timers.  
They are completely independent, and do not  
share any resources. They are synchronized after  
a MCU reset as long as the timer clock frequen-  
cies are not modified.  
– Counter Low Register (CLR) is the least sig-  
nificant byte (LS Byte).  
Alternate Counter Register (ACR)  
– Alternate Counter High Register (ACHR) is the  
most significant byte (MS Byte).  
– Alternate Counter Low Register (ACLR) is the  
least significant byte (LS Byte).  
This description covers one or two 16-bit timers. In  
ST7 devices with two timers, register names are  
prefixed with TA (Timer A) or TB (Timer B).  
9.3.2 Main Features  
Programmableprescaler:fCPU dividedby2,4or8.  
Overflow status flag and maskable interrupt  
External clock input (must be at least 4 times  
slowerthantheCPUclockspeed)withthechoice  
of active edge  
1 or 2 Output Compare functions each with:  
– 2 dedicated 16-bit registers  
These two read-only 16-bit registers contain the  
same value but with the difference that reading the  
ACLR register does not clear the TOF bit (Timer  
overflow flag), located in the Status register, (SR),  
(see note at the end of paragraph titled 16-bit read  
sequence).  
Writing in the CLR register or ACLR register resets  
the free running counter to the FFFCh value.  
Both counters have a reset value of FFFCh (this is  
the only value which is reloaded in the 16-bit tim-  
er). The reset value of both counters is also  
FFFCh in One Pulse mode and PWM mode.  
– 2 dedicated programmable signals  
– 2 dedicated status flags  
– 1 dedicated maskable interrupt  
1 or 2 Input Capture functions each with:  
– 2 dedicated 16-bit registers  
The timer clock depends on the clock control bits  
of the CR2 register, as illustrated in Table 14 Clock  
Control Bits. The value in the counter register re-  
peats every 131072, 262144 or 524288 CPU clock  
cycles depending on the CC[1:0] bits.  
– 2 dedicated active edge selection signals  
– 2 dedicated status flags  
– 1 dedicated maskable interrupt  
Pulse width modulation mode (PWM)  
One pulse mode  
The timer frequency can be f  
or an external frequency.  
/2, f  
/4, f  
/8  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
Reduced Power Mode  
5 alternate functions on I/O ports (ICAP1, ICAP2,  
OCMP1, OCMP2, EXTCLK)*  
The Block Diagram is shown in Figure 31.  
*Note: Some timer pins may not be available (not  
bonded) in some ST7 devices. Refer to the device  
pin out description.  
51/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 31. Timer Block Diagram  
ST7 INTERNAL BUS  
f
CPU  
MCU-PERIPHERAL INTERFACE  
8 low  
8-bit  
8 high  
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
buffer  
EXEDG  
16  
INPUT  
CAPTURE  
REGISTER  
INPUT  
CAPTURE  
REGISTER  
OUTPUT  
COMPARE  
REGISTER  
OUTPUT  
COMPARE  
REGISTER  
1/2  
1/4  
1/8  
COUNTER  
REGISTER  
1
1
2
2
ALTERNATE  
COUNTER  
REGISTER  
EXTCLK  
pin  
16  
16  
16  
CC[1:0]  
TIMER INTERNAL BUS  
16 16  
OVERFLOW  
DETECT  
EDGE DETECT  
CIRCUIT1  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
CIRCUIT  
ICAP1  
pin  
CIRCUIT  
6
EDGE DETECT  
CIRCUIT2  
ICAP2  
pin  
OCMP1  
pin  
LATCH1  
LATCH2  
0
ICF1 OCF1 TOF ICF2 OCF2  
0
TIMD  
(Control/Status Register)  
OCMP2  
pin  
CSR  
EXEDG  
ICIE OCIE TOIE FOLV2 FOLV1OLVL2 IEDG1 OLVL1  
OC1E  
OPM PWM CC1 CC0 IEDG2  
OC2E  
(Control Register 1) CR1  
(Control Register 2) CR2  
(See note)  
Note: If IC, OC and TO interrupt requests have separate vectors  
then the last OR is not present (See device Interrupt Vector Table)  
TIMER INTERRUPT  
52/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
16-bit read sequence: (from either the Counter  
Register or the Alternate Counter Register).  
Clearing the overflow interrupt request is done in  
two steps:  
1. Reading the SR register while the TOF bit is set.  
2. An access (read or write) to the CLR register.  
Beginning of the sequence  
Read  
LS Byte  
Notes: The TOF bit is not cleared by accesses to  
ACLR register. The advantage of accessing the  
ACLR register rather than the CLR register is that  
it allows simultaneous use of the overflow function  
and reading the free running counter at random  
times (for example, to measure elapsed time) with-  
out the risk of clearing the TOF bit erroneously.  
MS Byte  
At t0  
is buffered  
Other  
instructions  
Returns the buffered  
LS Byte value at t0  
Read  
LS Byte  
At t0 +t  
The timer is not affected by WAIT mode.  
In HALT mode, the counter stops counting until the  
mode is exited. Counting then resumes from the  
previous count (MCU awakened by an interrupt) or  
from the reset count (MCU awakened by a Reset).  
Sequence completed  
The user must read the MS Byte first, then the LS  
Byte value is buffered automatically.  
This buffered value remains unchanged until the  
16-bit read sequence is completed, even if the  
user reads the MS Byte several times.  
9.3.3.2 External Clock  
The external clock (where available) is selected if  
CC0=1 and CC1=1 in the CR2 register.  
After a complete reading sequence, if only the  
CLR register or ACLR register are read, they re-  
turn the LS Byte of the count value at the time of  
the read.  
The status of the EXEDG bit in the CR2 register  
determines the type of level transition on the exter-  
nal clock pin EXTCLK that will trigger the free run-  
ning counter.  
Whatever the timer mode used (input capture, out-  
put compare, one pulse mode or PWM mode) an  
overflow occurs when the counter rolls over from  
FFFFh to 0000h then:  
The counter is synchronized with the falling edge  
of the internal CPU clock.  
A minimum of four falling edges of the CPU clock  
must occur between two consecutive active edges  
of the external clock; thus the external clock fre-  
quency must be less than a quarter of the CPU  
clock frequency.  
– The TOF bit of the SR register is set.  
– A timer interrupt is generated if:  
– TOIE bit of the CR1 register is set and  
– I bit of the CC register is cleared.  
If one of these conditions is false, the interrupt re-  
mains pending to be issued as soon as they are  
both true.  
53/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 32. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 2  
CPU CLOCK  
INTERNAL RESET  
TIMER CLOCK  
FFFD FFFE FFFF 0000 0001 0002 0003  
COUNTER REGISTER  
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)  
Figure 33. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 4  
CPU CLOCK  
INTERNAL RESET  
TIMER CLOCK  
FFFC  
FFFD  
0000  
0001  
COUNTER REGISTER  
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)  
Figure 34. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 8  
CPU CLOCK  
INTERNAL RESET  
TIMER CLOCK  
0000  
FFFC  
FFFD  
COUNTER REGISTER  
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)  
Note: The MCU is in reset state when the internal reset signal is high, when it is low the MCU is running.  
54/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
9.3.3.3 Input Capture  
When an input capture occurs:  
In this section, the index, i, may be 1 or 2 because  
there are 2 input capture functions in the 16-bit  
timer.  
– ICFi bit is set.  
– The ICiR register contains the value of the free  
running counter on the active transition on the  
ICAPi pin (see Figure 36).  
The two 16-bit input capture registers (IC1R and  
IC2R) are used to latch the value of the free run-  
ning counter after a transition is detected on the  
ICAPi pin (see figure 5).  
– A timer interrupt is generated if the ICIE bit is set  
and the I bit is cleared in the CC register. Other-  
wise, the interrupt remains pending until both  
conditions become true.  
MS Byte  
LS Byte  
ICiR  
ICiHR  
ICiLR  
Clearing the Input Capture interrupt request (i.e.  
clearing the ICFi bit) is done in two steps:  
ICiR register is a read-only register.  
1. Reading the SR register while the ICFi bit is set.  
2. An access (read or write) to the ICiLR register.  
The active transition is software programmable  
through the IEDGi bit of Control Registers (CRi).  
Timing resolution is one count of the free running  
Notes:  
counter: (f  
/CC[1:0]).  
CPU  
1. After reading the ICiHR register, transfer of  
input capture data is inhibited and ICFi will  
never be set until the ICiLR register is also  
read.  
Procedure:  
To use the input capture function select the follow-  
ing in the CR2 register:  
2. The ICiR register contains the free running  
counter value which corresponds to the most  
recent input capture.  
– Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see Table 14  
Clock Control Bits).  
3. The 2 input capture functions can be used  
together even if the timer also uses the 2 output  
compare functions.  
– Select the edge of the active transition on the  
ICAP2 pin with the IEDG2 bit (the ICAP2 pin  
must be configured as floating input or input with  
pull-up without interrupt if this configuration is  
available).  
4. In One pulse Mode and PWM mode only Input  
Capture 2 can be used.  
And select the following in the CR1 register:  
5. The alternate inputs (ICAP1 & ICAP2) are  
always directly connected to the timer. So any  
transitions on these pins activates the input  
capture function.  
– Set the ICIE bit to generate an interrupt after an  
input capture coming from either the ICAP1 pin  
or the ICAP2 pin  
Moreover if one of the ICAPi pins is configured  
as an input and the second one as an output,  
an interrupt can be generated if the user tog-  
gles the output pin and if the ICIE bit is set.  
This can be avoided if the input capture func-  
tion i is disabled by reading the ICiHR (see note  
1).  
– Select the edge of the active transition on the  
ICAP1 pin with the IEDG1 bit (the ICAP1pin must  
be configured as floating input or input with pull-  
up without interrupt if this configuration is availa-  
ble).  
6. The TOF bit can be used with interrupt genera-  
tion in order to measure events that go beyond  
the timer range (FFFFh).  
55/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 35. Input Capture Block Diagram  
ICAP1  
pin  
(Control Register 1) CR1  
EDGE DETECT  
CIRCUIT2  
EDGE DETECT  
CIRCUIT1  
ICIE  
IEDG1  
ICAP2  
pin  
(Status Register) SR  
ICF1  
ICF2  
0
0
0
IC2R Register  
IC1R Register  
(Control Register 2) CR2  
16-BIT  
16-BIT FREE RUNNING  
COUNTER  
IEDG2  
CC0  
CC1  
Figure 36. Input Capture Timing Diagram  
TIMER CLOCK  
FF01  
FF02  
FF03  
COUNTER REGISTER  
ICAPi PIN  
ICAPi FLAG  
FF03  
ICAPi REGISTER  
Note: The rising edge is the active edge.  
56/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
9.3.3.4 Output Compare  
– The OCMPi pin takes OLVLi bit value (OCMPi  
pin latch is forced low during reset).  
In this section, the index, i, may be 1 or 2 because  
there are 2 output compare functions in the 16-bit  
timer.  
– A timer interrupt is generated if the OCIE bit is  
set in the CR1 register and the I bit is cleared in  
the CC register (CC).  
This function can be used to control an output  
waveform or indicate when a period of time has  
elapsed.  
The OCiR register value required for a specific tim-  
ing application can be calculated using the follow-  
ing formula:  
When a match is found between the Output Com-  
pare register and the free running counter, the out-  
put compare function:  
– Assigns pins with a programmable value if the  
t f  
PRESC  
* CPU  
OCiR =  
OCiE bit is set  
– Sets a flag in the status register  
– Generates an interrupt if enabled  
Where:  
t  
= Output compare period (in seconds)  
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)  
Two 16-bit registers Output Compare Register 1  
(OC1R) and Output Compare Register 2 (OC2R)  
contain the value to be compared to the counter  
register each timer clock cycle.  
f
CPU  
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 de-  
pending on CC[1:0] bits, see Table 14  
Clock Control Bits)  
PRESC  
MS Byte  
LS Byte  
OCiR  
OCiHR  
OCiLR  
If the timer clock is an external clock, the formula  
is:  
These registers are readable and writable and are  
not affected by the timer hardware. A reset event  
changes the OCiR value to 8000h.  
OCiR = t f  
* EXT  
Timing resolution is one count of the free running  
Where:  
counter: (f  
).  
CC[1:0]  
CPU/  
t  
= Output compare period (in seconds)  
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)  
f
EXT  
Procedure:  
To use the output compare function, select the fol-  
lowing in the CR2 register:  
Clearing the output compare interrupt request (i.e.  
clearing the OCFi bit) is done by:  
– Set the OCiE bit if an output is needed then the  
OCMPi pin is dedicated to the output compare i  
signal.  
1. Reading the SR register while the OCFi bit is  
set.  
2. An access (read or write) to the OCiLR register.  
– Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see Table 14  
Clock Control Bits).  
The following procedure is recommended to pre-  
vent the OCFi bit from being set between the time  
it is read and the write to the OCiR register:  
And select the following in the CR1 register:  
– Select the OLVLi bit to applied to the OCMPi pins  
after the match occurs.  
– Write to the OCiHR register (further compares  
are inhibited).  
– Set the OCIE bit to generate an interrupt if it is  
needed.  
– Read the SR register (first step of the clearance  
of the OCFi bit, which may be already set).  
When a match is found between OCRi register  
and CR register:  
– Write to the OCiLR register (enables the output  
compare function and clears the OCFi bit).  
– OCFi bit is set.  
57/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Notes:  
1. After a processor write cycle to the OCiHR reg-  
ister, the output compare function is inhibited  
until the OCiLR register is also written.  
Forced Compare Output capability  
When the FOLVi bit is set by software, the OLVLi  
bit is copied to the OCMPi pin. The OLVi bit has to  
be toggled in order to toggle the OCMPi pin when  
it is enabled (OCiE bit=1). The OCFi bit is then not  
set by hardware, and thus no interrupt request is  
generated.  
2. If the OCiE bit is not set, the OCMPi pin is a  
general I/O port and the OLVLi bit will not  
appear when a match is found but an interrupt  
could be generated if the OCIE bit is set.  
3. When the timer clock is f  
/2, OCFi and  
The FOLVLi bits have no effect in both one pulse  
mode and PWM mode.  
CPU  
OCMPi are set while the counter value equals  
the OCiR register value (see Figure 38 on page  
59). This behaviour is the same in OPM or  
PWM mode.  
When the timer clock is f  
/4, f  
/8 or in  
CPU  
CPU  
external clock mode, OCFi and OCMPi are set  
while the counter value equals the OCiR regis-  
ter value plus 1 (see Figure 39 on page 59).  
4. The output compare functions can be used both  
for generating external events on the OCMPi  
pins even if the input capture mode is also  
used.  
5. The value in the 16-bit OCiR register and the  
OLVi bit should be changed after each suc-  
cessful comparison in order to control an output  
waveform or establish a new elapsed timeout.  
Figure 37. Output Compare Block Diagram  
16 BIT FREE RUNNING  
OC1E  
CC1 CC0  
OC2E  
COUNTER  
(Control Register 2) CR2  
16-bit  
(Control Register 1) CR1  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
CIRCUIT  
Latch  
1
OCIE  
FOLV2 FOLV1OLVL2  
OLVL1  
OCMP1  
Pin  
16-bit  
16-bit  
Latch  
2
OCMP2  
Pin  
OC1R Register  
OCF1  
OCF2  
0
0
0
OC2R Register  
(Status Register) SR  
58/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 38. Output Compare Timing Diagram, f  
=f  
/2  
TIMER  
CPU  
INTERNAL CPU CLOCK  
TIMER CLOCK  
COUNTER REGISTER  
2ECF 2ED0 2ED1 2ED2  
2ED3  
2ED4  
2ED3  
OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER i (OCRi)  
OUTPUT COMPARE FLAG i (OCFi)  
OCMPi PIN (OLVLi=1)  
Figure 39. Output Compare Timing Diagram, f  
=f  
/4  
TIMER  
CPU  
INTERNAL CPU CLOCK  
TIMER CLOCK  
2ECF 2ED0 2ED1 2ED2  
2ED3  
2ED4  
2ED3  
COUNTER REGISTER  
OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER i (OCRi)  
COMPARE REGISTER i LATCH  
OUTPUT COMPARE FLAG i (OCFi)  
OCMPi PIN (OLVLi=1)  
59/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
9.3.3.5 One Pulse Mode  
Clearing the Input Capture interrupt request (i.e.  
clearing the ICFi bit) is done in two steps:  
One Pulse mode enables the generation of a  
pulse when an external event occurs. This mode is  
selected via the OPM bit in the CR2 register.  
1. Reading the SR register while the ICFi bit is set.  
2. An access (read or write) to the ICiLR register.  
The one pulse mode uses the Input Capture1  
function and the Output Compare1 function.  
The OC1R register value required for a specific  
timing application can be calculated using the fol-  
lowing formula:  
Procedure:  
t * f  
To use one pulse mode:  
CPU  
- 5  
OCiR Value =  
1. Load the OC1R register with the value corre-  
sponding to the length of the pulse (see the for-  
mula in the opposite column).  
PRESC  
Where:  
t
= Pulse period (in seconds)  
2. Select the following in the CR1 register:  
f
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)  
CPU  
– Using the OLVL1 bit, select the level to be ap-  
plied to the OCMP1 pin after the pulse.  
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 depend-  
ing on the CC[1:0] bits, see Table 14  
Clock Control Bits)  
PRESC  
– Using the OLVL2 bit, select the level to be ap-  
plied to the OCMP1 pin during the pulse.  
If the timer clock is an external clock the formula is:  
– Select the edge of the active transition on the  
ICAP1 pin with the IEDG1 bit (the ICAP1 pin  
must be configured as floating input).  
OCiR = t f  
-5  
* EXT  
Where:  
t
3. Select the following in the CR2 register:  
= Pulse period (in seconds)  
– Set the OC1E bit, the OCMP1 pin is then ded-  
icated to the Output Compare 1 function.  
f
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)  
EXT  
– Set the OPM bit.  
When the value of the counter is equal to the value  
of the contents of the OC1R register, the OLVL1  
bit is output on the OCMP1 pin, (See Figure 40).  
– Select the timer clock CC[1:0] (see Table 14  
Clock Control Bits).  
One pulse mode cycle  
Notes:  
ICR1 = Counter  
When  
1. The OCF1 bit cannot be set by hardware in one  
pulse mode but the OCF2 bit can generate an  
Output Compare interrupt.  
OCMP1 = OLVL2  
event occurs  
on ICAP1  
Counter is reset  
2. When the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and  
One Pulse Mode (OPM) bits are both set, the  
PWM mode is the only active one.  
to FFFCh  
ICF1 bit is set  
3. If OLVL1=OLVL2 a continuous signal will be  
seen on the OCMP1 pin.  
When  
Counter  
OCMP1 = OLVL1  
= OC1R  
4. The ICAP1 pin can not be used to perform input  
capture. The ICAP2 pin can be used to perform  
input capture (ICF2 can be set and IC2R can be  
loaded) but the user must take care that the  
counter is reset each time a valid edge occurs  
on the ICAP1 pin and ICF1 can also generates  
interrupt if ICIE is set.  
Then, on a valid event on the ICAP1 pin, the coun-  
ter is initialized to FFFCh and OLVL2 bit is loaded  
on the OCMP1 pin, the ICF1 bit is set and the val-  
ue FFFDh is loaded in the IC1R register.  
Because the ICF1 bit is set when an active edge  
occurs, an interrupt can be generated if the ICIE  
bit is set.  
5. When one pulse mode is used OC1R is dedi-  
cated to this mode. Nevertheless OC2R and  
OCF2 can be used to indicate a period of time  
has been elapsed but cannot generate an out-  
put waveform because the level OLVL2 is dedi-  
cated to the one pulse mode.  
60/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 40. One Pulse Mode Timing Example  
2ED3  
01F8  
IC1R  
FFFC FFFD FFFE  
2ED0 2ED1 2ED2  
2ED3  
FFFC FFFD  
01F8  
COUNTER  
ICAP1  
OLVL2  
OLVL1  
OLVL2  
OCMP1  
compare1  
Note: IEDG1=1, OC1R=2ED0h, OLVL1=0, OLVL2=1  
Figure 41. Pulse Width Modulation Mode Timing Example with 2 Output Compare Functions  
2ED0 2ED1 2ED2  
34E2 FFFC  
FFFC FFFD FFFE  
34E2  
COUNTER  
OCMP1  
OLVL2  
OLVL1  
OLVL2  
compare2  
compare1  
compare2  
Note: OC1R=2ED0h, OC2R=34E2, OLVL1=0, OLVL2= 1  
Note: On timers with only 1 Output Compare register, a fixed frequency PWM signal can be generated us-  
ing the output compare and the counter overflow to define the pulse length.  
61/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
9.3.3.6 Pulse Width Modulation Mode  
If OLVL1=1 and OLVL2=0 the length of the posi-  
tive pulse is the difference between the OC2R and  
OC1R registers.  
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode enables the  
generation of a signal with a frequency and pulse  
length determined by the value of the OC1R and  
OC2R registers.  
If OLVL1=OLVL2 a continuous signal will be seen  
on the OCMP1 pin.  
Pulse Width Modulation mode uses the complete  
Output Compare 1 function plus the OC2R regis-  
ter, and so this functionality can not be used when  
PWM mode is activated.  
The OCiR register value required for a specific tim-  
ing application can be calculated using the follow-  
ing formula:  
t * f  
CPU  
PRESC  
- 5  
OCiR Value =  
In PWM mode, double buffering is implemented on  
the output compare registers. Any new values writ-  
ten in the OC1R and OC2R registers are taken  
into account only at the end of the PWM period  
(OC2) to avoid spikes on the PWM output pin  
(OCMP1).  
Where:  
t
= Signal or pulse period (in seconds)  
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)  
f
CPU  
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 depend-  
ing on CC[1:0] bits, see Table 14 Clock  
Control Bits)  
PRESC  
Procedure  
To use pulse width modulation mode:  
If the timer clock is an external clock the formula is:  
1. Load the OC2R register with the value corre-  
sponding to the period of the signal using the  
formula in the opposite column.  
OCiR = t f  
-5  
* EXT  
2. Load the OC1R register with the value corre-  
sponding to the period of the pulse if (OLVL1=0  
and OLVL2=1) using the formula in the oppo-  
site column.  
Where:  
t
= Signal or pulse period (in seconds)  
f
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)  
EXT  
3. Select the following in the CR1 register:  
The Output Compare 2 event causes the counter  
to be initialized to FFFCh (See Figure 41)  
– Using the OLVL1 bit, select the level to be ap-  
plied to the OCMP1 pin after a successful  
comparison with the OC1R register.  
Notes:  
– Using the OLVL2 bit, select the level to be ap-  
plied to the OCMP1 pin after a successful  
comparison with the OC2R register.  
1. After a write instruction to the OCiHR register,  
the output compare function is inhibited until the  
OCiLR register is also written.  
4. Select the following in the CR2 register:  
2. The OCF1 and OCF2 bits cannot be set by  
hardware in PWM mode therefore the Output  
Compare interrupt is inhibited.  
– Set OC1E bit: the OCMP1 pin is then dedicat-  
ed to the output compare 1 function.  
3. The ICF1 bit is set by hardware when the coun-  
ter reaches the OC2R value and can produce a  
timer interrupt if the ICIE bit is set and the I bit is  
cleared.  
– Set the PWM bit.  
– Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see Table 14  
Clock Control Bits).  
Pulse Width Modulation cycle  
4. In PWM mode the ICAP1 pin can not be used  
to perform input capture because it is discon-  
nected to the timer. The ICAP2 pin can be used  
to perform input capture (ICF2 can be set and  
IC2R can be loaded) but the user must take  
care that the counter is reset each period and  
ICF1 can also generates interrupt if ICIE is set.  
When  
Counter  
= OC1R  
OCMP1 = OLVL1  
OCMP1 = OLVL2  
5. When the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and  
One Pulse Mode (OPM) bits are both set, the  
PWM mode is the only active one.  
When  
Counter  
= OC2R  
Counter is reset  
to FFFCh  
ICF1 bit is set  
62/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
9.3.4 Low Power Modes  
Mode  
Description  
No effect on 16-bit Timer.  
Timer interrupts cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.  
WAIT  
16-bit Timer registers are frozen.  
In HALT mode, the counter stops counting until Halt mode is exited. Counting resumes from the previous  
count when the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with “exit from HALT mode” capability or from the counter  
reset value when the MCU is woken up by a RESET.  
HALT  
If an input capture event occurs on the ICAPi pin, the input capture detection circuitry is armed. Consequent-  
ly, when the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with “exit from HALT mode” capability, the ICFi bit is set, and  
the counter value present when exiting from HALT mode is captured into the ICiR register.  
9.3.5 Interrupts  
Enable  
Control from  
Bit  
Exit  
Exit  
from  
Halt  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
Wait  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Input Capture 1 event/Counter reset in PWM mode  
Input Capture 2 event  
ICF1  
ICF2  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
ICIE  
Output Compare 1 event (not available in PWM mode)  
Output Compare 2 event (not available in PWM mode)  
Timer Overflow event  
OCF1  
OCF2  
TOF  
OCIE  
TOIE  
Note: The 16-bit Timer interrupt events are connected to the same interrupt vector (see Interrupts chap-  
ter). These events generate an interrupt if the corresponding Enable Control Bit is set and the interrupt  
mask in the CC register is reset (RIM instruction).  
9.3.6 Summary of Timer modes  
TIMER RESOURCES  
MODES  
Input Capture 1  
Input Capture 2  
Yes  
Output Compare 1 Output Compare 2  
Input Capture (1 and/or 2)  
Output Compare (1 and/or 2)  
One Pulse Mode  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
1)  
3)  
2)  
Not Recommended  
Not Recommended  
Partially  
No  
PWM Mode  
No  
No  
1) See note 4 in Section 9.3.3.5 One Pulse Mode  
2) See note 5 in Section 9.3.3.5 One Pulse Mode  
3) See note 4 in Section 9.3.3.6 Pulse Width Modulation Mode  
63/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
9.3.7 Register Description  
Bit 4 = FOLV2 Forced Output Compare 2.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: No effect on the OCMP2 pin.  
1:Forces the OLVL2 bit to be copied to the  
OCMP2 pin, if the OC2E bit is set and even if  
there is no successful comparison.  
Each Timer is associated with three control and  
status registers, and with six pairs of data registers  
(16-bit values) relating to the two input captures,  
the two output compares, the counter and the al-  
ternate counter.  
Bit 3 = FOLV1 Forced Output Compare 1.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: No effect on the OCMP1 pin.  
CONTROL REGISTER 1 (CR1)  
Read/Write  
1: Forces OLVL1 to be copied to the OCMP1 pin, if  
the OC1E bit is set and even if there is no suc-  
cessful comparison.  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
ICIE OCIE TOIE FOLV2 FOLV1 OLVL2 IEDG1 OLVL1  
Bit 2 = OLVL2 Output Level 2.  
This bit is copied to the OCMP2 pin whenever a  
successful comparison occurs with the OC2R reg-  
ister and OCxE is set in the CR2 register. This val-  
ue is copied to the OCMP1 pin in One Pulse Mode  
and Pulse Width Modulation mode.  
Bit 7 = ICIE Input Capture Interrupt Enable.  
0: Interrupt is inhibited.  
1: A timer interrupt is generated whenever the  
ICF1 or ICF2 bit of the SR register is set.  
Bit 6 = OCIE Output Compare Interrupt Enable.  
0: Interrupt is inhibited.  
1: A timer interrupt is generated whenever the  
OCF1 or OCF2 bit of the SR register is set.  
Bit 1 = IEDG1 Input Edge 1.  
This bit determines which type of level transition  
on the ICAP1 pin will trigger the capture.  
0: A falling edge triggers the capture.  
1: A rising edge triggers the capture.  
Bit 5 = TOIE Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable.  
0: Interrupt is inhibited.  
1: A timer interrupt is enabled whenever the TOF  
bit of the SR register is set.  
Bit 0 = OLVL1 Output Level 1.  
The OLVL1 bit is copied to the OCMP1 pin when-  
ever a successful comparison occurs with the  
OC1R register and the OC1E bit is set in the CR2  
register.  
64/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
CONTROL REGISTER 2 (CR2)  
Read/Write  
Bit 4 = PWM Pulse Width Modulation.  
0: PWM mode is not active.  
1: PWM mode is active, the OCMP1 pin outputs a  
programmable cyclic signal; the length of the  
pulse depends on the value of OC1R register;  
the period depends on the value of OC2R regis-  
ter.  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
OC1E OC2E OPM PWM CC1 CC0 IEDG2 EXEDG  
Bit 3, 2 = CC[1:0] Clock Control.  
Bit 7 = OC1E Output Compare 1 Pin Enable.  
This bit is used only to output the signal from the  
timer on the OCMP1 pin (OLV1 in Output Com-  
pare mode, both OLV1 and OLV2 in PWM and  
one-pulse mode). Whatever the value of the OC1E  
bit, the Output Compare 1 function of the timer re-  
mains active.  
0: OCMP1 pin alternate function disabled (I/O pin  
free for general-purpose I/O).  
1: OCMP1 pin alternate function enabled.  
The timer clock mode depends on these bits:  
Table 14. Clock Control Bits  
Timer Clock  
fCPU / 4  
CC1  
CC0  
0
0
1
0
1
0
fCPU / 2  
fCPU / 8  
External Clock (where  
available)  
1
1
Bit 6 = OC2E Output Compare 2 Pin Enable.  
This bit is used only to output the signal from the  
timer on the OCMP2 pin (OLV2 in Output Com-  
pare mode). Whatever the value of the OC2E bit,  
the Output Compare 2 function of the timer re-  
mains active.  
0: OCMP2 pin alternate function disabled (I/O pin  
free for general-purpose I/O).  
1: OCMP2 pin alternate function enabled.  
Note: If the external clock pin is not available, pro-  
gramming the external clock configuration stops  
the counter.  
Bit 1 = IEDG2 Input Edge 2.  
This bit determines which type of level transition  
on the ICAP2 pin will trigger the capture.  
0: A falling edge triggers the capture.  
1: A rising edge triggers the capture.  
Bit 5 = OPM One Pulse Mode.  
0: One Pulse Mode is not active.  
1: One Pulse Mode is active, the ICAP1 pin can be  
used to trigger one pulse on the OCMP1 pin; the  
active transition is given by the IEDG1 bit. The  
length of the generated pulse depends on the  
contents of the OC1R register.  
Bit 0 = EXEDG External Clock Edge.  
This bit determines which type of level transition  
on the external clock pin EXTCLK will trigger the  
counter register.  
0: A falling edge triggers the counter register.  
1: A rising edge triggers the counter register.  
65/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (CSR)  
Read/Write (bits 7:3 read only)  
Reset Value: xxxx x0xx (xxh)  
7
Note: Reading or writing the ACLR register does  
not clear TOF.  
Bit 4 = ICF2 Input Capture Flag 2.  
0: No input capture (reset value).  
1: An input capture has occurred on the ICAP2  
pin. To clear this bit, first read the SR register,  
then read or write the low byte of the IC2R  
(IC2LR) register.  
0
0
ICF1 OCF1 TOF ICF2 OCF2 TIMD  
0
Bit 7 = ICF1 Input Capture Flag 1.  
0: No input capture (reset value).  
1: An input capture has occurred on the ICAP1 pin  
or the counter has reached the OC2R value in  
PWM mode. To clear this bit, first read the SR  
register, then read or write the low byte of the  
IC1R (IC1LR) register.  
Bit 3 = OCF2 Output Compare Flag 2.  
0: No match (reset value).  
1: The content of the free running counter has  
matched the content of the OC2R register. To  
clear this bit, first read the SR register, then read  
or write the low byte of the OC2R (OC2LR) reg-  
ister.  
Bit 6 = OCF1 Output Compare Flag 1.  
0: No match (reset value).  
1: The content of the free running counter has  
matched the content of the OC1R register. To  
clear this bit, first read the SR register, then read  
or write the low byte of the OC1R (OC1LR) reg-  
ister.  
Bit 2 = TIMD Timer disable.  
This bit is set and cleared by software. When set, it  
freezes the timer prescaler and counter and disa-  
bled the output functions (OCMP1 and OCMP2  
pins) to reduce power consumption. Access to the  
timer registers is still available, allowing the timer  
configuration to be changed, or the counter reset,  
while it is disabled.  
Bit 5 = TOF Timer Overflow Flag.  
0: No timer overflow (reset value).  
1:The free running counter rolled over from FFFFh  
to 0000h. To clear this bit, first read the SR reg-  
ister, then read or write the low byte of the CR  
(CLR) register.  
0: Timer enabled  
1: Timer prescaler, counter and outputs disabled  
Bits 1:0 = Reserved, must be kept cleared.  
66/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
INPUT CAPTURE 1 HIGH REGISTER (IC1HR)  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
(OC1HR)  
1
HIGH REGISTER  
Read Only  
Reset Value: Undefined  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 1000 0000 (80h)  
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the  
high part of the counter value (transferred by the  
input capture 1 event).  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part  
of the value to be compared to the CHR register.  
7
0
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
MSB  
LSB  
INPUT CAPTURE 1 LOW REGISTER (IC1LR)  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
(OC1LR)  
1
LOW REGISTER  
Read Only  
Reset Value: Undefined  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the  
low part of the counter value (transferred by the in-  
put capture 1 event).  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of  
the value to be compared to the CLR register.  
7
0
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
MSB  
LSB  
67/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
(OC2HR)  
2
HIGH REGISTER  
ALTERNATE COUNTER HIGH REGISTER  
(ACHR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 1000 0000 (80h)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part  
of the value to be compared to the CHR register.  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part  
of the counter value.  
7
0
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
MSB  
LSB  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
(OC2LR)  
2
LOW REGISTER  
ALTERNATE COUNTER LOW REGISTER  
(ACLR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 1111 1100 (FCh)  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of  
the value to be compared to the CLR register.  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of  
the counter value. A write to this register resets the  
counter. An access to this register after an access  
to CSR register does not clear the TOF bit in the  
CSR register.  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
7
0
COUNTER HIGH REGISTER (CHR)  
MSB  
LSB  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)  
INPUT CAPTURE 2 HIGH REGISTER (IC2HR)  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part  
of the counter value.  
Read Only  
Reset Value: Undefined  
7
0
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the  
high part of the counter value (transferred by the  
Input Capture 2 event).  
MSB  
LSB  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
COUNTER LOW REGISTER (CLR)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 1111 1100 (FCh)  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of  
the counter value. A write to this register resets the  
counter. An access to this register after accessing  
the CSR register clears the TOF bit.  
INPUT CAPTURE 2 LOW REGISTER (IC2LR)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: Undefined  
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the  
low part of the counter value (transferred by the In-  
put Capture 2 event).  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
68/140  
1
ST72323  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Table 15. 16-Bit Timer Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
Timer A: 32 CR1  
Timer B: 42 Reset Value  
ICIE  
0
OCIE  
0
TOIE  
0
FOLV2  
0
FOLV1  
0
OLVL2  
0
IEDG1  
0
OLVL1  
0
Timer A: 31 CR2  
Timer B: 41 Reset Value  
OC1E  
0
OC2E  
0
OPM  
0
PWM  
0
CC1  
0
CC0  
0
IEDG2  
0
EXEDG  
0
Timer A: 33 CSR  
Timer B: 43 Reset Value  
ICF1  
x
OCF1  
x
TOF  
x
ICF2  
x
OCF2  
x
TIMD  
0
-
x
-
x
Timer A: 34 IC1HR  
Timer B: 44 Reset Value  
MSB  
x
LSB  
x
x
x
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
x
x
x
x
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
x
x
x
x
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
x
x
x
x
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
x
x
x
x
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
x
x
x
x
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
x
x
Timer A: 35 IC1LR  
Timer B: 45 Reset Value  
MSB  
x
LSB  
x
Timer A: 36 OC1HR  
Timer B: 46 Reset Value  
MSB  
1
LSB  
0
Timer A: 37 OC1LR  
Timer B: 47 Reset Value  
MSB  
0
LSB  
0
Timer A: 3E OC2HR  
Timer B: 4E Reset Value  
MSB  
1
LSB  
0
Timer A: 3F OC2LR  
Timer B: 4F Reset Value  
MSB  
0
LSB  
0
Timer A: 38 CHR  
Timer B: 48 Reset Value  
MSB  
1
LSB  
1
Timer A: 39 CLR  
Timer B: 49 Reset Value  
MSB  
1
LSB  
0
Timer A: 3A ACHR  
Timer B: 4A Reset Value  
MSB  
1
LSB  
1
Timer A: 3B ACLR  
Timer B: 4B Reset Value  
MSB  
1
LSB  
0
Timer A: 3C IC2HR  
Timer B: 4C Reset Value  
MSB  
x
LSB  
x
Timer A: 3D IC2LR  
Timer B: 4D Reset Value  
MSB  
x
LSB  
x
69/140  
1
ST72323  
9.4 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)  
9.4.1 Introduction  
Note: In slave mode, continuous transmission is  
not possible at maximum frequency due to the  
software overhead for clearing status flags and to  
initiate the next transmission sequence.  
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows full-  
duplex, synchronous, serial communication with  
external devices. An SPI system may consist of a  
master and one or more slaves however the SPI  
interface can not be a master in a multi-master  
system.  
9.4.3 General Description  
Figure 42 shows the serial peripheral interface  
(SPI) block diagram. There are 3 registers:  
9.4.2 Main Features  
– SPI Control Register (SPICR)  
– SPI Control/Status Register (SPICSR)  
– SPI Data Register (SPIDR)  
Full duplex synchronous transfers (on 3 lines)  
Simplex synchronous transfers (on 2 lines)  
Master or slave operation  
The SPI is connected to external devices through  
4 pins:  
Six master mode frequencies (f  
/4 max.)  
CPU  
f  
/2 max. slave mode frequency (see note)  
CPU  
– MISO: Master In / Slave Out data  
– MOSI: Master Out / Slave In data  
SS Management by software or hardware  
Programmable clock polarity and phase  
End of transfer interrupt flag  
– SCK: Serial Clock out by SPI masters and in-  
put by SPI slaves  
Write collision, Master Mode Fault and Overrun  
flags  
Figure 42. Serial Peripheral Interface Block Diagram  
Data/Address Bus  
Read  
SPIDR  
Interrupt  
request  
Read Buffer  
MOSI  
7
0
SPICSR  
MISO  
8-Bit Shift Register  
SPIF WCOL OVR MODF  
0
SOD SSM SSI  
Write  
SOD  
bit  
1
SS  
SPI  
STATE  
0
SCK  
CONTROL  
7
0
SPICR  
MSTR  
SPR0  
SPIE SPE SPR2  
CPOL CPHA SPR1  
MASTER  
CONTROL  
SERIAL CLOCK  
GENERATOR  
SS  
70/140  
1
ST72323  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
– SS: Slave select:  
The communication is always initiated by the mas-  
ter. When the master device transmits data to a  
slave device via MOSI pin, the slave device re-  
sponds by sending data to the master device via  
the MISO pin. This implies full duplex communica-  
tion with both data out and data in synchronized  
with the same clock signal (which is provided by  
the master device via the SCK pin).  
This input signal acts as a ‘chip select’ to let  
the SPI master communicate with slaves indi-  
vidually and to avoid contention on the data  
lines. Slave SS inputs can be driven by stand-  
ard I/O ports on the master MCU.  
9.4.3.1 Functional Description  
A basic example of interconnections between a  
single master and a single slave is illustrated in  
Figure 43.  
To use a single data line, the MISO and MOSI pins  
must be connected at each node ( in this case only  
simplex communication is possible).  
The MOSI pins are connected together and the  
MISO pins are connected together. In this way  
data is transferred serially between master and  
slave (most significant bit first).  
Four possible data/clock timing relationships may  
be chosen (see Figure 46) but master and slave  
must be programmed with the same timing mode.  
Figure 43. Single Master/ Single Slave Application  
SLAVE  
MASTER  
MSBit  
LSBit  
MSBit  
LSBit  
MISO  
MOSI  
MISO  
MOSI  
8-BIT SHIFT REGISTER  
8-BIT SHIFT REGISTER  
SPI  
CLOCK  
GENERATOR  
SCK  
SS  
SCK  
SS  
+5V  
Not used if SS is managed  
by software  
71/140  
1
ST72323  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
9.4.3.2 Slave Select Management  
In Slave Mode:  
As an alternative to using the SS pin to control the  
Slave Select signal, the application can choose to  
manage the Slave Select signal by software. This  
is configured by the SSM bit in the SPICSR regis-  
ter (see Figure 45)  
There are two cases depending on the data/clock  
timing relationship (see Figure 44):  
If CPHA=1 (data latched on 2nd clock edge):  
– SS internal must be held low during the entire  
transmission. This implies that in single slave  
applications the SS pin either can be tied to  
In software management, the external SS pin is  
free for other application uses and the internal SS  
signal level is driven by writing to the SSI bit in the  
SPICSR register.  
V
, or made free for standard I/O by manag-  
SS  
ing the SS function by software (SSM= 1 and  
SSI=0 in the in the SPICSR register)  
If CPHA=0 (data latched on 1st clock edge):  
In Master mode:  
– SS internal must be held low during byte  
transmission and pulled high between each  
byte to allow the slave to write to the shift reg-  
ister. If SS is not pulled high, a Write Collision  
error will occur when the slave writes to the  
shift register (see Section 9.4.5.3).  
– SS internal must be held high continuously  
Figure 44. Generic SS Timing Diagram  
Byte 3  
Byte 2  
MOSI/MISO  
Master SS  
Byte 1  
Slave SS  
(if CPHA=0)  
Slave SS  
(if CPHA=1)  
Figure 45. Hardware/Software Slave Select Management  
SSM bit  
SSI bit  
1
0
SS internal  
SS external pin  
72/140  
1
ST72323  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
9.4.3.3 Master Mode Operation  
Note: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the  
SPIDR register are inhibited until the SPICSR reg-  
ister is read.  
In master mode, the serial clock is output on the  
SCK pin. The clock frequency, polarity and phase  
are configured by software (refer to the description  
of the SPICSR register).  
9.4.3.5 Slave Mode Operation  
In slave mode, the serial clock is received on the  
SCK pin from the master device.  
Note: The idle state of SCK must correspond to  
the polarity selected in the SPICSR register (by  
pulling up SCK if CPOL=1 or pulling down SCK if  
CPOL=0).  
To operate the SPI in slave mode:  
1. Write to the SPICSR register to perform the fol-  
lowing actions:  
To operate the SPI in master mode, perform the  
following steps in order:  
– Select the clock polarity and clock phase by  
configuring the CPOL and CPHA bits (see  
Figure 46).  
1. Write to the SPICR register:  
Note: The slave must have the same CPOL  
– Select the clock frequency by configuring the  
and CPHA settings as the master.  
SPR[2:0] bits.  
– Manage the SS pin as described in Section  
9.4.3.2 and Figure 44. If CPHA=1 SS must be  
held low continuously. If CPHA=0 SS must be  
held low during byte transmission and pulled  
up between each byte to let the slave write in  
the shift register.  
– Select the clock polarity and clock phase by  
configuring the CPOL and CPHA bits. Figure  
46 shows the four possible configurations.  
Note: The slave must have the same CPOL  
and CPHA settings as the master.  
2. Write to the SPICSR register:  
2. Write to the SPICR register to clear the MSTR  
bit and set the SPE bit to enable the SPI I/O  
functions.  
– Either set the SSM bit and set the SSI bit or  
clear the SSM bit and tie the SS pin high for  
the complete byte transmit sequence.  
9.4.3.6 Slave Mode Transmit Sequence  
3. Write to the SPICR register:  
When software writes to the SPIDR register, the  
data byte is loaded into the 8-bit shift register and  
then shifted out serially to the MISO pin most sig-  
nificant bit first.  
– Set the MSTR and SPE bits  
Note: MSTR and SPE bits remain set only if  
SS is high).  
Important note: if the SPICSR register is not writ-  
ten first, the SPICR register setting (MSTR bit)  
may be not taken into account.  
The transmit sequence begins when the slave de-  
vice receives the clock signal and the most signifi-  
cant bit of the data on its MOSI pin.  
The transmit sequence begins when software  
writes a byte in the SPIDR register.  
When data transfer is complete:  
– The SPIF bit is set by hardware  
9.4.3.4 Master Mode Transmit Sequence  
When software writes to the SPIDR register, the  
data byte is loaded into the 8-bit shift register and  
then shifted out serially to the MOSI pin most sig-  
nificant bit first.  
– An interrupt request is generated if SPIE bit is  
set and interrupt mask in the CCR register is  
cleared.  
Clearing the SPIF bit is performed by the following  
software sequence:  
When data transfer is complete:  
– The SPIF bit is set by hardware  
1. An access to the SPICSR register while the  
SPIF bit is set.  
– An interrupt request is generated if the SPIE  
bit is set and the interrupt mask in the CCR  
register is cleared.  
2. A write or a read to the SPIDR register.  
Notes: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the  
SPIDR register are inhibited until the SPICSR reg-  
ister is read.  
Clearing the SPIF bit is performed by the following  
software sequence:  
1. An access to the SPICSR register while the  
SPIF bit is set  
The SPIF bit can be cleared during a second  
transmission; however, it must be cleared before  
the second SPIF bit in order to prevent an Overrun  
condition (see Section 9.4.5.2).  
2. A read to the SPIDR register.  
73/140  
1
ST72323  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
9.4.4 Clock Phase and Clock Polarity  
Figure 46, shows an SPI transfer with the four  
combinations of the CPHA and CPOL bits. The di-  
agram may be interpreted as a master or slave  
timing diagram where the SCK pin, the MISO pin,  
the MOSI pin are directly connected between the  
master and the slave device.  
Four possible timing relationships may be chosen  
by software, using the CPOL and CPHA bits (See  
Figure 46).  
Note: The idle state of SCK must correspond to  
the polarity selected in the SPICSR register (by  
pulling up SCK if CPOL=1 or pulling down SCK if  
CPOL=0).  
Note: If CPOL is changed at the communication  
byte boundaries, the SPI must be disabled by re-  
setting the SPE bit.  
The combination of the CPOL clock polarity and  
CPHA (clock phase) bits selects the data capture  
clock edge  
Figure 46. Data Clock Timing Diagram  
CPHA =1  
SCK  
(CPOL = 1)  
SCK  
(CPOL = 0)  
Bit 4  
Bit 4  
Bit3  
Bit3  
Bit 2  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 1  
LSBit  
LSBit  
MSBit Bit 6  
MSBit Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 5  
MISO  
(from master)  
MOSI  
(from slave)  
SS  
(to slave)  
CAPTURE STROBE  
CPHA =0  
SCK  
(CPOL = 1)  
SCK  
(CPOL = 0)  
Bit 4  
Bit 4  
Bit3  
Bit 2  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 1  
LSBit  
LSBit  
MISO  
(from master)  
MSBit Bit 6  
MSBit Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 5  
Bit3  
MOSI  
(from slave)  
SS  
(to slave)  
CAPTURE STROBE  
Note: This figure should not be used as a replacement for parametric information.  
Refer to the Electrical Characteristics chapter.  
74/140  
1
ST72323  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
9.4.5 Error Flags  
not cleared the SPIF bit issued from the previously  
transmitted byte.  
9.4.5.1 Master Mode Fault (MODF)  
When an Overrun occurs:  
Master mode fault occurs when the master device  
has its SS pin pulled low.  
– The OVR bit is set and an interrupt request is  
generated if the SPIE bit is set.  
When a Master mode fault occurs:  
In this case, the receiver buffer contains the byte  
sent after the SPIF bit was last cleared. A read to  
the SPIDR register returns this byte. All other  
bytes are lost.  
– The MODF bit is set and an SPI interrupt re-  
quest is generated if the SPIE bit is set.  
– The SPE bit is reset. This blocks all output  
from the device and disables the SPI periph-  
eral.  
The OVR bit is cleared by reading the SPICSR  
register.  
– The MSTR bit is reset, thus forcing the device  
into slave mode.  
9.4.5.3 Write Collision Error (WCOL)  
A write collision occurs when the software tries to  
write to the SPIDR register while a data transfer is  
taking place with an external device. When this  
happens, the transfer continues uninterrupted;  
and the software write will be unsuccessful.  
Clearing the MODF bit is done through a software  
sequence:  
1. A read access to the SPICSR register while the  
MODF bit is set.  
2. A write to the SPICR register.  
Write collisions can occur both in master and slave  
mode. See also Section 9.4.3.2 Slave Select Man-  
agement.  
Notes: To avoid any conflicts in an application  
with multiple slaves, the SS pin must be pulled  
high during the MODF bit clearing sequence. The  
SPE and MSTR bits may be restored to their orig-  
inal state during or after this clearing sequence.  
Note: a "read collision" will never occur since the  
received data byte is placed in a buffer in which  
access is always synchronous with the MCU oper-  
ation.  
Hardware does not allow the user to set the SPE  
and MSTR bits while the MODF bit is set except in  
the MODF bit clearing sequence.  
The WCOL bit in the SPICSR register is set if a  
write collision occurs.  
9.4.5.2 Overrun Condition (OVR)  
No SPI interrupt is generated when the WCOL bit  
is set (the WCOL bit is a status flag only).  
An overrun condition occurs, when the master de-  
vice has sent a data byte and the slave device has  
Clearing the WCOL bit is done through a software  
sequence (see Figure 47).  
Figure 47. Clearing the WCOL bit (Write Collision Flag) Software Sequence  
Clearing sequence after SPIF = 1 (end of a data byte transfer)  
Read SPICSR  
1st Step  
RESULT  
SPIF =0  
WCOL=0  
2nd Step  
Read SPIDR  
Clearing sequence before SPIF = 1 (during a data byte transfer)  
Read SPICSR  
1st Step  
Note: Writing to the SPIDR regis-  
ter instead of reading it does not  
reset the WCOL bit  
RESULT  
2nd Step  
Read SPIDR  
WCOL=0  
75/140  
1
ST72323  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
9.4.5.4 Single Master Systems  
Note: To prevent a bus conflict on the MISO line  
the master allows only one active slave device  
during a transmission.  
A typical single master system may be configured,  
using an MCU as the master and four MCUs as  
slaves (see Figure 48).  
For more security, the slave device may respond  
to the master with the received data byte. Then the  
master will receive the previous byte back from the  
slave device if all MISO and MOSI pins are con-  
nected and the slave has not written to its SPIDR  
register.  
The master device selects the individual slave de-  
vices by using four pins of a parallel port to control  
the four SS pins of the slave devices.  
The SS pins are pulled high during reset since the  
master device ports will be forced to be inputs at  
that time, thus disabling the slave devices.  
Other transmission security methods can use  
ports for handshake lines or data bytes with com-  
mand fields.  
Figure 48. Single Master / Multiple Slave Configuration  
SS  
SS  
SS  
SS  
SCK  
SCK  
Slave  
SCK  
Slave  
MCU  
SCK  
Slave  
MCU  
Slave  
MCU  
MCU  
MOSI MISO  
MOSI MISO  
MOSI MISO  
MOSI MISO  
MOSI MISO  
SCK  
Master  
MCU  
5V  
SS  
76/140  
1
ST72323  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
9.4.6 Low Power Modes  
Note: When waking up from Halt mode, if the SPI  
remains in Slave mode, it is recommended to per-  
form an extra communications cycle to bring the  
SPI from Halt mode state to normal state. If the  
SPI exits from Slave mode, it returns to normal  
state immediately.  
Mode  
Description  
No effect on SPI.  
WAIT  
SPI interrupt events cause the device to exit  
from WAIT mode.  
SPI registers are frozen.  
Caution: The SPI can wake up the ST7 from Halt  
mode only if the Slave Select signal (external SS  
pin or the SSI bit in the SPICSR register) is low  
when the ST7 enters Halt mode. So if Slave selec-  
tion is configured as external (see Section  
9.4.3.2), make sure the master drives a low level  
on the SS pin when the slave enters Halt mode.  
In HALT mode, the SPI is inactive. SPI oper-  
ation resumes when the MCU is woken up by  
an interrupt with “exit from HALT mode” ca-  
pability. The data received is subsequently  
read from the SPIDR register when the soft-  
ware is running (interrupt vector fetching). If  
several data are received before the wake-  
up event, then an overrun error is generated.  
This error can be detected after the fetch of  
the interrupt routine that woke up the device.  
HALT  
9.4.7 Interrupts  
Enable  
Control from  
Bit  
Exit  
Exit  
from  
Halt  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
Wait  
9.4.6.1 Using the SPI to wakeup the MCU from  
Halt mode  
SPI End of Transfer  
Event  
SPIF  
Yes  
Yes  
In slave configuration, the SPI is able to wakeup  
the ST7 device from HALT mode through a SPIF  
interrupt. The data received is subsequently read  
from the SPIDR register when the software is run-  
ning (interrupt vector fetch). If multiple data trans-  
fers have been performed before software clears  
the SPIF bit, then the OVR bit is set by hardware.  
Master Mode Fault  
Event  
SPIE  
MODF  
OVR  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Overrun Error  
Note: The SPI interrupt events are connected to  
the same interrupt vector (see Interrupts chapter).  
They generate an interrupt if the corresponding  
Enable Control Bit is set and the interrupt mask in  
77/140  
1
ST72323  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
9.4.8 Register Description  
CONTROL REGISTER (SPICR)  
Read/Write  
Bit 3 = CPOL Clock Polarity.  
This bit is set and cleared by software. This bit de-  
termines the idle state of the serial Clock. The  
CPOL bit affects both the master and slave  
modes.  
Reset Value: 0000 xxxx (0xh)  
7
0
0: SCK pin has a low level idle state  
1: SCK pin has a high level idle state  
SPIE SPE SPR2 MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0  
Note: If CPOL is changed at the communication  
byte boundaries, the SPI must be disabled by re-  
setting the SPE bit.  
Bit 7 = SPIE Serial Peripheral Interrupt Enable.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: Interrupt is inhibited  
1: An SPI interrupt is generated whenever  
SPIF=1, MODF=1 or OVR=1 in the SPICSR  
register  
Bit 2 = CPHA Clock Phase.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: The first clock transition is the first data capture  
edge.  
1: The second clock transition is the first capture  
edge.  
Bit 6 = SPE Serial Peripheral Output Enable.  
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also  
cleared by hardware when, in master mode, SS=0  
(see Section 9.4.5.1 Master Mode Fault (MODF)).  
The SPE bit is cleared by reset, so the SPI periph-  
eral is not initially connected to the external pins.  
0: I/O pins free for general purpose I/O  
Note: The slave must have the same CPOL and  
CPHA settings as the master.  
Bits 1:0 = SPR[1:0] Serial Clock Frequency.  
These bits are set and cleared by software. Used  
with the SPR2 bit, they select the baud rate of the  
SPI serial clock SCK output by the SPI in master  
mode.  
1: SPI I/O pin alternate functions enabled  
Note: These 2 bits have no effect in slave mode.  
Bit 5 = SPR2 Divider Enable.  
This bit is set and cleared by software and is  
cleared by reset. It is used with the SPR[1:0] bits to  
set the baud rate. Refer to Table 16 SPI Master  
mode SCK Frequency.  
Table 16. SPI Master mode SCK Frequency  
Serial Clock  
SPR2 SPR1 SPR0  
f
f
/4  
/8  
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0: Divider by 2 enabled  
1: Divider by 2 disabled  
CPU  
CPU  
Note: This bit has no effect in slave mode.  
f
f
f
/16  
/32  
/64  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
Bit 4 = MSTR Master Mode.  
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also  
cleared by hardware when, in master mode, SS=0  
(see Section 9.4.5.1 Master Mode Fault (MODF)).  
0: Slave mode  
f
/128  
CPU  
1: Master mode. The function of the SCK pin  
changes from an input to an output and the func-  
tions of the MISO and MOSI pins are reversed.  
78/140  
1
ST72323  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (SPICSR)  
Read/Write (some bits Read Only)  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Bit 3 = Reserved, must be kept cleared.  
Bit 2 = SOD SPI Output Disable.  
7
0
This bit is set and cleared by software. When set, it  
disables the alternate function of the SPI output  
(MOSI in master mode / MISO in slave mode)  
0: SPI output enabled (if SPE=1)  
SPIF  
WCOL OVR MODF  
-
SOD SSM SSI  
1: SPI output disabled  
Bit 7 = SPIF Serial Peripheral Data Transfer Flag  
(Read only).  
Bit 1 = SSM SS Management.  
This bit is set by hardware when a transfer has  
been completed. An interrupt is generated if  
SPIE=1 in the SPICR register. It is cleared by a  
software sequence (an access to the SPICSR  
register followed by a write or a read to the  
SPIDR register).  
This bit is set and cleared by software. When set, it  
disables the alternate function of the SPI SS pin  
and uses the SSI bit value instead. See Section  
9.4.3.2 Slave Select Management.  
0: Hardware management (SS managed by exter-  
nal pin)  
1: Software management (internal SS signal con-  
trolled by SSI bit. External SS pin free for gener-  
al-purpose I/O)  
0: Data transfer is in progress or the flag has been  
cleared.  
1: Data transfer between the device and an exter-  
nal device has been completed.  
Note: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the  
SPIDR register are inhibited until the SPICSR reg-  
ister is read.  
Bit 0 = SSI SS Internal Mode.  
This bit is set and cleared by software. It acts as a  
‘chip select’ by controlling the level of the SS slave  
select signal when the SSM bit is set.  
0 : Slave selected  
Bit 6 = WCOL Write Collision status (Read only).  
This bit is set by hardware when a write to the  
SPIDR register is done during a transmit se-  
quence. It is cleared by a software sequence (see  
Figure 47).  
0: No write collision occurred  
1: A write collision has been detected  
1 : Slave deselected  
DATA I/O REGISTER (SPIDR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: Undefined  
7
0
Bit 5 = OVR SPI Overrun error (Read only).  
This bit is set by hardware when the byte currently  
being received in the shift register is ready to be  
transferred into the SPIDR register while SPIF = 1  
(See Section 9.4.5.2). An interrupt is generated if  
SPIE = 1 in SPICR register. The OVR bit is cleared  
by software reading the SPICSR register.  
0: No overrun error  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
The SPIDR register is used to transmit and receive  
data on the serial bus. In a master device, a write  
to this register will initiate transmission/reception  
of another byte.  
1: Overrun error detected  
Notes: During the last clock cycle the SPIF bit is  
set, a copy of the received data byte in the shift  
register is moved to a buffer. When the user reads  
the serial peripheral data I/O register, the buffer is  
actually being read.  
Bit 4 = MODF Mode Fault flag (Read only).  
This bit is set by hardware when the SS pin is  
pulled low in master mode (see Section 9.4.5.1  
Master Mode Fault (MODF)). An SPI interrupt can  
be generated if SPIE=1 in the SPICSR register.  
This bit is cleared by a software sequence (An ac-  
cess to the SPICR register while MODF=1 fol-  
lowed by a write to the SPICR register).  
While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the SPIDR  
register are inhibited until the SPICSR register is  
read.  
Warning: A write to the SPIDR register places  
data directly into the shift register for transmission.  
0: No master mode fault detected  
1: A fault in master mode has been detected  
A read to the SPIDR register returns the value lo-  
cated in the buffer and not the content of the shift  
register (see Figure 42).  
79/140  
1
ST72323  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
Table 17. SPI Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SPIDR  
Reset Value  
MSB  
x
LSB  
x
0021h  
0022h  
0023h  
x
x
x
x
x
x
SPICR  
Reset Value  
SPIE  
0
SPE  
0
SPR2  
0
MSTR  
0
CPOL  
x
CPHA  
x
SPR1  
x
SPR0  
x
SPICSR  
Reset Value  
SPIF  
0
WCOL  
0
OR  
0
MODF  
0
SOD  
0
SSM  
0
SSI  
0
0
80/140  
1
ST72323  
9.5 10-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC)  
9.5.1 Introduction  
9.5.2 Main Features  
10-bit conversion  
Up to 16 channels with multiplexed input  
Linear successive approximation  
Data register (DR) which contains the results  
Conversion complete status flag  
On/off bit (to reduce consumption)  
The block diagram is shown in Figure 49.  
The on-chip Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) pe-  
ripheral is a 10-bit, successive approximation con-  
verter with internal sample and hold circuitry. This  
peripheral has up to 16 multiplexed analog input  
channels (refer to device pin out description) that  
allow the peripheral to convert the analog voltage  
levels from up to 16 different sources.  
The result of the conversion is stored in a 10-bit  
Data Register. The A/D converter is controlled  
through a Control/Status Register.  
Figure 49. ADC Block Diagram  
f
ADC  
f
CPU  
DIV 4  
DIV 2  
MAX  
SPEED  
CH3  
EOC SPEEDADON  
CH2 CH1 CH0  
ADCCSR  
4
AIN0  
AIN1  
ANALOG TO DIGITAL  
CONVERTER  
ANALOG  
MUX  
AINx  
ADCDRH  
D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4  
D3  
D2  
ADCDRL  
0
0
0
0
0
0
D1  
D0  
81/140  
1
ST72323  
10-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) (Cont’d)  
9.5.3 Functional Description  
The conversion is monotonic, meaning that the re-  
sult never decreases if the analog input does not  
and never increases if the analog input does not.  
To read the 10 bits, perform the following steps:  
1. Poll the EOC bit  
2. Read the ADCDRL register  
If the input voltage (V ) is greater than V  
AIN  
AREF  
3. Read the ADCDRH register. This clears EOC  
automatically.  
(high-level voltage reference) then the conversion  
result is FFh in the ADCDRH register and 03h in  
the ADCDRL register (without overflow indication).  
Note: The data is not latched, so both the low and  
the high data register must be read before the next  
conversion is complete, so it is recommended to  
disable interrupts while reading the conversion re-  
sult.  
If the input voltage (V ) is lower than V  
(low-  
SSA  
AIN  
level voltage reference) then the conversion result  
in the ADCDRH and ADCDRL registers is 00 00h.  
The A/D converter is linear and the digital result of  
the conversion is stored in the ADCDRH and AD-  
CDRL registers. The accuracy of the conversion is  
described in the Electrical Characteristics Section.  
To read only 8 bits, perform the following steps:  
1. Poll the EOC bit  
2. Read the ADCDRH register. This clears EOC  
automatically.  
R
is the maximum recommended impedance  
AIN  
for an analog input signal. If the impedance is too  
high, this will result in a loss of accuracy due to  
leakage and sampling not being completed in the  
alloted time.  
9.5.3.3 Changing the conversion channel  
The application can change channels during con-  
version. When software modifies the CH[3:0] bits  
in the ADCCSR register, the current conversion is  
stopped, the EOC bit is cleared, and the A/D con-  
verter starts converting the newly selected chan-  
nel.  
9.5.3.1 A/D Converter Configuration  
The analog input ports must be configured as in-  
put, no pull-up, no interrupt. Refer to the «I/O  
ports» chapter. Using these pins as analog inputs  
does not affect the ability of the port to be read as  
a logic input.  
9.5.4 Low Power Modes  
Note: The A/D converter may be disabled by re-  
setting the ADON bit. This feature allows reduced  
power consumption when no conversion is need-  
ed.  
In the ADCCSR register:  
– Select the CS[3:0] bits to assign the analog  
channel to convert.  
9.5.3.2 Starting the Conversion  
Mode  
Description  
WAIT  
No effect on A/D Converter  
A/D Converter disabled.  
In the ADCCSR register:  
– Set the ADON bit to enable the A/D converter  
and to start the conversion. From this time on,  
the ADC performs a continuous conversion of  
the selected channel.  
After wakeup from Halt mode, the A/D  
Converter requires a stabilization time  
HALT  
t
(see Electrical Characteristics)  
STAB  
before accurate conversions can be  
performed.  
When a conversion is complete:  
– The EOC bit is set by hardware.  
– The result is in the ADCDR registers.  
A read to the ADCDRH resets the EOC bit.  
9.5.5 Interrupts  
None.  
82/140  
1
ST72323  
10-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) (Cont’d)  
9.5.6 Register Description  
CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (ADCCSR)  
Read/Write (Except bit 7 read only)  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Bit 3:0 = CH[3:0] Channel Selection  
These bits are set and cleared by software. They  
select the analog input to convert.  
Channel Pin*  
CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0  
7
0
AIN0  
AIN1  
AIN2  
AIN3  
AIN4  
AIN5  
AIN6  
AIN7  
AIN8  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
MAX_S  
PEED  
EOC SPEED ADON  
CH3  
CH2  
CH1  
CH0  
Bit 7 = EOC End of Conversion  
This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by hard-  
ware when software reads the ADCDRH register  
or writes to any bit of the ADCCSR register.  
0: Conversion is not complete  
AIN9  
1: Conversion complete  
AIN10  
AIN11  
AIN12  
AIN13  
AIN14  
AIN15  
Bit 6 = SPEED ADC clock selection  
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is used  
together with the MAX_SPEED bit to select the  
ADC frequency. Refer to Table 18  
*The number of channels is device dependent. Refer to  
the device pinout description.  
Bit 5 = ADON A/D Converter on  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: Disable ADC and stop conversion  
1: Enable ADC and start conversion  
DATA REGISTER (ADCDRH)  
Read Only  
Bit 4 = MAX_SPEED Max. Speed Selection  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is used  
together with the SPEED bit to select the ADC fre-  
quency. Refer to Table 18  
7
0
D9  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
Table 18. ADC Speed Selection  
MAX_SPEED bit  
SPEED bit  
f
ADC  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
f
f
f
/4  
/2  
/2  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
Bit 7:0 = D[9:2] MSB of Converted Analog Value  
DATA REGISTER (ADCDRL)  
Read Only  
f
(See note)  
CPU  
Note: The maximum frequency of the ADC is 4  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
MHz. The MAX_SPEED bit must be kept at 0  
(reset state) is f  
is greater than 4 MHz.  
CPU  
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D1  
D0  
Bit 7:2 = Reserved. Forced by hardware to 0.  
Bit 1:0 = D[1:0] LSB of Converted Analog Value  
83/140  
1
ST72323  
10-BIT A/D CONVERTER (Cont’d)  
Table 19. ADC Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MAX_  
SPEED  
0
ADCCSR  
Reset Value  
EOC  
0
SPEED  
0
ADON  
0
CH3  
0
CH2  
0
CH1  
0
CH0  
0
0070h  
ADCDRH  
Reset Value  
D9  
0
D8  
0
D7  
0
D6  
0
D5  
0
D4  
0
D3  
0
D2  
0
0071h  
0072h  
ADCDRL  
Reset Value  
D1  
0
D0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
84/140  
1
ST72323  
10 INSTRUCTION SET  
10.1 CPU ADDRESSING MODES  
so, most of the addressing modes may be subdi-  
vided in two sub-modes called long and short:  
The CPU features 17 different addressing modes  
which can be classified in 7 main groups:  
– Long addressing mode is more powerful be-  
cause it can use the full 64 Kbyte address space,  
however it uses more bytes and more CPU cy-  
cles.  
Addressing Mode  
Inherent  
Example  
nop  
– Short addressing mode is less powerful because  
it can generally only access page zero (0000h -  
00FFh range), but the instruction size is more  
compact, and faster. All memory to memory in-  
structions use short addressing modes only  
(CLR, CPL, NEG, BSET, BRES, BTJT, BTJF,  
INC, DEC, RLC, RRC, SLL, SRL, SRA, SWAP)  
Immediate  
Direct  
ld A,#$55  
ld A,$55  
ld A,($55,X)  
ld A,([$55],X)  
jrne loop  
Indexed  
Indirect  
Relative  
Bit operation  
bset byte,#5  
The ST7 Assembler optimizes the use of long and  
short addressing modes.  
The CPU Instruction set is designed to minimize  
the number of bytes required per instruction: To do  
Table 20. CPU Addressing Mode Overview  
Pointer  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Pointer Size  
(Hex.)  
Length  
(Bytes)  
Mode  
Syntax  
Destination  
Inherent  
Immediate  
Short  
Long  
nop  
+ 0  
ld A,#$55  
+ 1  
+ 1  
+ 2  
+ 0  
+ 1  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 1  
+ 2  
+ 1  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 3  
Direct  
Direct  
Direct  
Direct  
Direct  
Indirect  
Indirect  
ld A,$10  
00..FF  
ld A,$1000  
ld A,(X)  
0000..FFFF  
00..FF  
No Offset  
Short  
Long  
Indexed  
Indexed  
Indexed  
ld A,($10,X)  
ld A,($1000,X)  
ld A,[$10]  
00..1FE  
0000..FFFF  
00..FF  
Short  
Long  
00..FF  
byte  
word  
byte  
word  
ld A,[$10.w]  
ld A,([$10],X)  
ld A,([$10.w],X)  
jrne loop  
0000..FFFF 00..FF  
00..1FE 00..FF  
Short  
Long  
Indirect Indexed  
Indirect Indexed  
Direct  
0000..FFFF 00..FF  
PC+/-127  
Relative  
Relative  
Bit  
Indirect  
jrne [$10]  
PC+/-127  
00..FF  
00..FF  
00..FF  
00..FF  
00..FF  
00..FF  
00..FF  
byte  
byte  
byte  
Direct  
bset $10,#7  
bset [$10],#7  
Bit  
Indirect  
Bit  
Direct  
Relative btjt $10,#7,skip  
Bit  
Indirect Relative btjt [$10],#7,skip  
85/140  
1
ST72323  
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont’d)  
10.1.1 Inherent  
10.1.3 Direct  
All Inherent instructions consist of a single byte.  
The opcode fully specifies all the required informa-  
tion for the CPU to process the operation.  
In Direct instructions, the operands are referenced  
by their memory address.  
The direct addressing mode consists of two sub-  
modes:  
Inherent Instruction  
Function  
No operation  
Direct (short)  
NOP  
The address is a byte, thus requires only one byte  
after the opcode, but only allows 00 - FF address-  
ing space.  
TRAP  
S/W Interrupt  
Wait For Interrupt (Low Pow-  
er Mode)  
WFI  
Direct (long)  
Halt Oscillator (Lowest Power  
Mode)  
HALT  
The address is a word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte ad-  
dressing space, but requires 2 bytes after the op-  
code.  
RET  
Sub-routine Return  
Interrupt Sub-routine Return  
Set Interrupt Mask (level 3)  
Reset Interrupt Mask (level 0)  
Set Carry Flag  
IRET  
SIM  
10.1.4 Indexed (No Offset, Short, Long)  
RIM  
In this mode, the operand is referenced by its  
memory address, which is defined by the unsigned  
addition of an index register (X or Y) with an offset.  
SCF  
RCF  
Reset Carry Flag  
RSP  
Reset Stack Pointer  
Load  
The indirect addressing mode consists of three  
sub-modes:  
LD  
CLR  
Clear  
Indexed (No Offset)  
PUSH/POP  
INC/DEC  
TNZ  
Push/Pop to/from the stack  
Increment/Decrement  
Test Negative or Zero  
1 or 2 Complement  
Byte Multiplication  
There is no offset, (no extra byte after the opcode),  
and allows 00 - FF addressing space.  
Indexed (Short)  
CPL, NEG  
MUL  
The offset is a byte, thus requires only one byte af-  
ter the opcode and allows 00 - 1FE addressing  
space.  
SLL, SRL, SRA, RLC,  
RRC  
Shift and Rotate Operations  
Swap Nibbles  
Indexed (long)  
SWAP  
The offset is a word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte ad-  
dressing space and requires 2 bytes after the op-  
code.  
10.1.2 Immediate  
Immediate instructions have two bytes, the first  
byte contains the opcode, the second byte con-  
tains the operand value.  
10.1.5 Indirect (Short, Long)  
The required data byte to do the operation is found  
by its memory address, located in memory (point-  
er).  
Immediate Instruction  
Function  
LD  
Load  
The pointer address follows the opcode. The indi-  
rect addressing mode consists of two sub-modes:  
CP  
Compare  
BCP  
Bit Compare  
Indirect (short)  
AND, OR, XOR  
ADC, ADD, SUB, SBC  
Logical Operations  
Arithmetic Operations  
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a  
byte, thus allowing 00 - FF addressing space, and  
requires 1 byte after the opcode.  
Indirect (long)  
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a  
word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte addressing space,  
and requires 1 byte after the opcode.  
86/140  
1
ST72323  
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont’d)  
10.1.6 Indirect Indexed (Short, Long)  
10.1.7 Relative mode (Direct, Indirect)  
This is a combination of indirect and short indexed  
addressing modes. The operand is referenced by  
its memory address, which is defined by the un-  
signed addition of an index register value (X or Y)  
with a pointer value located in memory. The point-  
er address follows the opcode.  
This addressing mode is used to modify the PC  
register value, by adding an 8-bit signed offset to  
it.  
Available Relative  
Direct/Indirect  
Instructions  
Function  
The indirect indexed addressing mode consists of  
two sub-modes:  
JRxx  
CALLR  
Conditional Jump  
Call Relative  
Indirect Indexed (Short)  
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a  
byte, thus allowing 00 - 1FE addressing space,  
and requires 1 byte after the opcode.  
The relative addressing mode consists of two sub-  
modes:  
Relative (Direct)  
Indirect Indexed (Long)  
The offset is following the opcode.  
Relative (Indirect)  
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a  
word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte addressing space,  
and requires 1 byte after the opcode.  
The offset is defined in memory, which address  
follows the opcode.  
Table 21. Instructions Supporting Direct,  
Indexed, Indirect and Indirect Indexed  
Addressing Modes  
Long and Short  
Function  
Instructions  
LD  
Load  
CP  
Compare  
AND, OR, XOR  
Logical Operations  
Arithmetic Additions/Sub-  
stractions operations  
ADC, ADD, SUB, SBC  
BCP  
Bit Compare  
Short Instructions  
Only  
Function  
CLR  
Clear  
INC, DEC  
TNZ  
Increment/Decrement  
Test Negative or Zero  
1 or 2 Complement  
Bit Operations  
CPL, NEG  
BSET, BRES  
Bit Test and Jump Opera-  
tions  
BTJT, BTJF  
SLL, SRL, SRA, RLC,  
RRC  
Shift and Rotate Opera-  
tions  
SWAP  
Swap Nibbles  
CALL, JP  
Call or Jump subroutine  
87/140  
1
ST72323  
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont’d)  
10.2 INSTRUCTION GROUPS  
The ST7 family devices use an Instruction Set  
consisting of 63 instructions. The instructions may  
be subdivided into 13 main groups as illustrated in  
the following table:  
Load and Transfer  
LD  
CLR  
POP  
DEC  
TNZ  
OR  
Stack operation  
PUSH  
INC  
RSP  
BCP  
Increment/Decrement  
Compare and Tests  
Logical operations  
CP  
AND  
BSET  
BTJT  
ADC  
SLL  
XOR  
CPL  
NEG  
Bit Operation  
BRES  
BTJF  
ADD  
SRL  
JRT  
Conditional Bit Test and Branch  
Arithmetic operations  
Shift and Rotates  
SUB  
SRA  
JRF  
SBC  
RLC  
JP  
MUL  
RRC  
CALL  
SWAP  
CALLR  
SLA  
Unconditional Jump or Call  
Conditional Branch  
JRA  
JRxx  
TRAP  
SIM  
NOP  
RET  
Interruption management  
Condition Code Flag modification  
WFI  
RIM  
HALT  
SCF  
IRET  
RCF  
Using a pre-byte  
The instructions are described with one to four op-  
codes.  
These prebytes enable instruction in Y as well as  
indirect addressing modes to be implemented.  
They precede the opcode of the instruction in X or  
the instruction using direct addressing mode. The  
prebytes are:  
In order to extend the number of available op-  
codes for an 8-bit CPU (256 opcodes), three differ-  
ent prebyte opcodes are defined. These prebytes  
modify the meaning of the instruction they pre-  
cede.  
PDY 90  
Replace an X based instruction  
using immediate, direct, indexed, or inherent ad-  
dressing mode by a Y one.  
The whole instruction becomes:  
PIX 92  
Replace an instruction using di-  
PC-2  
PC-1  
PC  
End of previous instruction  
Prebyte  
rect, direct bit, or direct relative addressing mode  
to an instruction using the corresponding indirect  
addressing mode.  
opcode  
It also changes an instruction using X indexed ad-  
dressing mode to an instruction using indirect X in-  
dexed addressing mode.  
PC+1  
Additional word (0 to 2) according  
to the number of bytes required to compute the ef-  
fective address  
PIY 91  
Replace an instruction using X in-  
direct indexed addressing mode by a Y one.  
88/140  
1
ST72323  
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont’d)  
Mnemo  
ADC  
ADD  
AND  
BCP  
Description  
Add with Carry  
Function/Example  
A = A + M + C  
A = A + M  
Dst  
Src  
I1  
H
H
H
I0  
N
N
N
N
N
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
C
C
C
A
M
Addition  
A
M
M
M
Logical And  
A = A . M  
A
Bit compare A, Memory  
Bit Reset  
tst (A . M)  
A
BRES  
BSET  
BTJF  
BTJT  
CALL  
CALLR  
CLR  
bres Byte, #3  
bset Byte, #3  
btjf Byte, #3, Jmp1  
btjt Byte, #3, Jmp1  
M
M
M
M
Bit Set  
Jump if bit is false (0)  
Jump if bit is true (1)  
Call subroutine  
Call subroutine relative  
Clear  
C
C
reg, M  
reg  
0
N
N
N
1
Z
Z
Z
CP  
Arithmetic Compare  
One Complement  
Decrement  
tst(Reg - M)  
A = FFH-A  
dec Y  
M
C
1
CPL  
reg, M  
reg, M  
DEC  
HALT  
IRET  
INC  
Halt  
1
0
Interrupt routine return  
Increment  
Pop CC, A, X, PC  
inc X  
I1  
H
I0  
N
N
Z
Z
C
reg, M  
JP  
Absolute Jump  
Jump relative always  
Jump relative  
jp [TBL.w]  
JRA  
JRT  
JRF  
Never jump  
jrf *  
JRIH  
JRIL  
Jump if ext. INT pin = 1  
Jump if ext. INT pin = 0  
Jump if H = 1  
(ext. INT pin high)  
(ext. INT pin low)  
H = 1 ?  
JRH  
JRNH  
JRM  
Jump if H = 0  
H = 0 ?  
Jump if I1:0 = 11  
Jump if I1:0 <> 11  
Jump if N = 1 (minus)  
Jump if N = 0 (plus)  
Jump if Z = 1 (equal)  
I1:0 = 11 ?  
I1:0 <> 11 ?  
N = 1 ?  
JRNM  
JRMI  
JRPL  
JREQ  
JRNE  
JRC  
N = 0 ?  
Z = 1 ?  
Jump if Z = 0 (not equal) Z = 0 ?  
Jump if C = 1  
Jump if C = 0  
Jump if C = 1  
C = 1 ?  
JRNC  
JRULT  
C = 0 ?  
Unsigned <  
Jmp if unsigned >=  
Unsigned >  
JRUGE Jump if C = 0  
JRUGT Jump if (C + Z = 0)  
89/140  
1
ST72323  
INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW (Cont’d)  
Mnemo  
JRULE  
LD  
Description  
Jump if (C + Z = 1)  
Load  
Function/Example  
Unsigned <=  
dst <= src  
Dst  
Src  
I1  
H
I0  
N
N
N
N
N
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
C
reg, M  
A, X, Y  
reg, M  
M, reg  
X, Y, A  
MUL  
NEG  
NOP  
OR  
Multiply  
X,A = X * A  
neg $10  
0
0
Negate (2's compl)  
No Operation  
OR operation  
C
A = A + M  
pop reg  
pop CC  
push Y  
C = 0  
A
M
reg  
CC  
M
M
POP  
Pop from the Stack  
M
I1  
1
H
I0  
0
C
0
PUSH  
RCF  
RET  
RIM  
Push onto the Stack  
Reset carry flag  
Subroutine Return  
Enable Interrupts  
Rotate left true C  
Rotate right true C  
Reset Stack Pointer  
Substract with Carry  
Set carry flag  
reg, CC  
I1:0 = 10 (level 0)  
C <= A <= C  
C => A => C  
S = Max allowed  
A = A - M - C  
C = 1  
RLC  
RRC  
RSP  
SBC  
SCF  
SIM  
reg, M  
reg, M  
N
N
Z
Z
C
C
A
M
N
Z
C
1
Disable Interrupts  
Shift left Arithmetic  
Shift left Logic  
I1:0 = 11 (level 3)  
C <= A <= 0  
C <= A <= 0  
0 => A => C  
A7 => A => C  
A = A - M  
1
1
SLA  
reg, M  
reg, M  
reg, M  
reg, M  
A
N
N
0
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
C
C
C
C
C
SLL  
SRL  
SRA  
SUB  
SWAP  
TNZ  
TRAP  
WFI  
Shift right Logic  
Shift right Arithmetic  
Substraction  
N
N
N
N
M
M
SWAP nibbles  
A7-A4 <=> A3-A0  
tnz lbl1  
reg, M  
Test for Neg & Zero  
S/W trap  
S/W interrupt  
1
1
1
0
Wait for Interrupt  
Exclusive OR  
XOR  
A = A XOR M  
A
N
Z
90/140  
1
ST72323  
11 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
11.1 PARAMETER CONDITIONS  
Unless otherwise specified, all voltages are re-  
ferred to V  
.
SS  
11.1.5 Pin input voltage  
11.1.1 Minimum and Maximum values  
The input voltage measurement on a pin of the de-  
vice is described in Figure 51.  
Unless otherwise specified the minimum and max-  
imum values are guaranteed in the worst condi-  
tions of ambient temperature, supply voltage and  
frequencies by tests in production on 100% of the  
Figure 51. Pin input voltage  
devices with an ambient temperature at T =25°C  
A
and T =T max (given by the selected temperature  
A
A
ST7 PIN  
range).  
Data based on characterization results, design  
simulation and/or technology characteristics are  
indicated in the table footnotes and are not tested  
in production. Based on characterization, the min-  
imum and maximum values refer to sample tests  
and represent the mean value plus or minus three  
times the standard deviation (mean 3Σ).  
V
IN  
11.1.2 Typical values  
Unless otherwise specified, typical data are based  
on T =25°C, V =5V. They are given only as de-  
A
DD  
sign guidelines and are not tested.  
11.1.3 Typical curves  
Unless otherwise specified, all typical curves are  
given only as design guidelines and are not tested.  
11.1.4 Loading capacitor  
The loading conditions used for pin parameter  
measurement are shown in Figure 50.  
Figure 50. Pin loading conditions  
ST7 PIN  
C
L
91/140  
1
ST72323  
11.2 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
Stresses above those listed as “absolute maxi-  
mum ratings” may cause permanent damage to  
the device. This is a stress rating only and func-  
tional operation of the device under these condi-  
tions is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating  
conditions for extended periods may affect device  
reliability.  
11.2.1 Voltage Characteristics  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Maximum value  
Unit  
V
- V  
Supply voltage  
6.5  
DD  
SS  
1) & 2)  
Input Voltage on true open drain pin  
VSS-0.3 to 6.5  
V
V
IN  
Input voltage on any other pin  
VSS-0.3 to VDD+0.3  
|V  
| and |V  
|
SSx  
Variations between different digital power pins  
Variations between digital and analog ground pins  
Electro-static discharge voltage (Human Body Model)  
Electro-static discharge voltage (Machine Model)  
50  
50  
DDx  
mV  
|V  
- V  
|
SSA  
SSx  
V
ESD(HBM)  
see Section 11.7.3 on page 105  
V
ESD(MM)  
11.2.2 Current Characteristics  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Maximum value  
Unit  
32-pin devices  
44-pin devices  
32-pin devices  
44-pin devices  
75  
150  
75  
150  
25  
50  
- 25  
5
Total current into V power lines  
(source)  
DD  
I
mA  
3)  
VDD  
Total current out of V ground lines  
SS  
I
mA  
mA  
3)  
VSS  
(sink)  
Output current sunk by any standard I/O and control pin  
Output current sunk by any high sink I/O pin  
Output current source by any I/Os and control pin  
Injected current on RESET pin  
I
IO  
2) & 4)  
2)  
I
Injected current on OSC1 and OSC2 pins  
5
INJ(PIN)  
5) & 6)  
Injected current on any other pin  
5
5)  
ΣI  
Total injected current (sum of all I/O and control pins)  
25  
INJ(PIN)  
Notes:  
1. Directly connecting the RESET and I/O pins to V or V could damage the device if an unintentional internal reset  
DD  
SS  
is generated or an unexpected change of the I/O configuration occurs (for example, due to a corrupted program counter).  
To guarantee safe operation, this connection has to be done through a pull-up or pull-down resistor (typical: 4.7kfor  
RESET, 10kfor I/Os). For the same reason, unused I/O pins must not be directly tied to V or V  
.
DD  
SS  
2. I  
must never be exceeded. This is implicitly insured if V maximum is respected. If V maximum cannot be  
INJ(PIN)  
IN  
INJ(PIN)  
IN  
respected, the injection current must be limited externally to the I  
value. A positive injection is induced by V >V  
IN DD  
while a negative injection is induced by V <V . For true open-drain pads, there is no positive injection current, and the  
corresponding V maximum must always be respected  
IN  
SS  
IN  
3. All power (V ) and ground (V ) lines must always be connected to the external supply.  
DD  
SS  
4. Negative injection disturbs the analog performance of the device. See note in “ADC Accuracy” on page 120.  
For best reliability, it is recommended to avoid negative injection of more than 1.6mA.  
5. When several inputs are submitted to a current injection, the maximum ΣI  
is the absolute sum of the positive  
INJ(PIN)  
and negative injected currents (instantaneous values). These results are based on characterisation with ΣI  
maxi-  
INJ(PIN)  
mum current injection on four I/O port pins of the device.  
6. True open drain I/O port pins do not accept positive injection.  
92/140  
1
ST72323  
11.2.3 Thermal Characteristics  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Value  
Unit  
T
Storage temperature range  
-65 to +150  
°C  
STG  
T
Maximum junction temperature (see Section 12.2 THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS)  
J
11.3 OPERATING CONDITIONS  
11.3.1 Operating Conditions (ST72323 5V devices)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Internal clock frequency  
Operating voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
0
Max  
8
Unit  
MHz  
V
f
CPU  
V
3.8  
0
5.5  
70  
DD  
1 Suffix Version  
5 Suffix Version  
-10  
-40  
-40  
-40  
85  
T
Ambient temperature range  
6 or A Suffix Versions  
7 or B Suffix Versions  
3 or C Suffix Version  
85  
°C  
A
105  
125  
Figure 52. f  
Max Versus VDD  
CPU  
f
[MHz]  
CPU  
FUNCTIONALITY  
GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
(UNLESS  
OTHERWISE  
SPECIFIED  
IN THE TABLES  
OF PARAMETRIC  
DATA)  
8
6
4
2
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
1
0
3.5  
3.8 4.0  
4.5  
5.5  
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]  
Note: Some temperature ranges are only available with a specific package and memory size. Refer to Or-  
dering Information.  
93/140  
1
ST72323  
11.3.2 Operating Conditions (ST72323L 3V devices)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Internal clock frequency  
Operating Voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
0
Max  
8
Unit  
MHz  
V
f
CPU  
V
2.85  
0
3.6  
70  
85  
85  
DD  
1 Suffix Version  
T
Ambient temperature range  
5 Suffix Version  
6 Suffix Version  
-10  
-40  
°C  
A
Figure 53. f  
Max Versus VDD  
CPU  
f
[MHz]  
CPU  
8
6
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
4
2
FUNCTIONALITY  
GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
1
0
2.85  
3.3  
3.6  
3.0  
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]  
94/140  
1
ST72323  
11.4 SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS  
The following current consumption specified for the ST7 functional operating modes over temperature  
range does not take into account the clock source current consumption. To get the total device consump-  
tion, the two current values must be added (except for HALT mode for which the clock is stopped).  
VDD=3V  
VDD=5V  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Unit  
1)  
1)  
Typ  
Max  
Typ  
Max  
f
f
f
f
=2MHz, f  
=1MHz  
=2MHz  
=4MHz  
0.23  
0.45  
0.88  
1.8  
0.5  
1.0  
2.0  
4.0  
0.46  
0.93  
1.9  
0.69  
1.4  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
Supply current in RUN mode  
=4MHz, f  
=8MHz, f  
mA  
2)  
2.7  
=16MHz, f  
=8MHz  
3.7  
5.5  
CPU  
f
f
f
f
=2MHz, f  
=4MHz, f  
=8MHz, f  
=62.5kHz  
=125kHz  
=250kHz  
15  
40  
45  
90  
180  
350  
30  
70  
150  
310  
60  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
Supply current in SLOW  
mode  
120  
250  
500  
µA  
mA  
µA  
2)  
80  
=16MHz, f  
=500kHz  
170  
CPU  
f
f
f
f
=2MHz, f  
=4MHz, f  
=8MHz, f  
=1MHz  
=2MHz  
=4MHz  
0.12  
0.22  
0.43  
0.83  
0.25  
0.5  
1
0.22  
0.45  
0.91  
1.82  
0.37  
0.75  
1.5  
3
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
I
DD  
Supply current in WAIT  
2)  
mode  
=16MHz, f  
=8MHz  
2
CPU  
f
f
f
f
=2MHz, f  
=4MHz, f  
=8MHz, f  
=62.5kHz  
=125kHz  
=250kHz  
10  
20  
50  
31  
63  
125  
250  
20  
40  
90  
40  
90  
180  
350  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
Supply current in SLOW  
2)  
WAIT mode  
=16MHz, f  
=500kHz  
100  
190  
CPU  
-40°CT +85°C  
<1  
10  
<1  
<1  
10  
50  
Supply current in HALT  
mode  
A
3)  
-40°CT +125°C  
A
f
f
f
f
=2MHz  
=4MHz  
=8MHz  
=16MHz  
11  
22  
43  
85  
15  
30  
60  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
µA  
Supply current in ACTIVE-  
HALT mode  
I
4)  
DD  
45  
100  
150  
Notes:  
1. Data based on characterization results, tested in production at V max. and f  
max.  
CPU  
DD  
2. Measurements are done in the following conditions:  
- Progam executed from RAM, CPU running with RAM access.  
- All I/O pins in input mode with a static value at V or V (no load)  
DD  
SS  
- All peripherals in reset state.  
- Clock input (OSC1) driven by external square wave.  
- In SLOW and SLOW WAIT mode, f is based on f  
divided by 32.  
OSC  
CPU  
To obtain the total current consumption of the device, add the clock source (Section 11.5.3) and the peripheral power  
consumption (Section 11.4.2).  
3. All I/O pins in push-pull 0 mode (when applicable) with a static value at V or V (no load). Data based on charac-  
DD  
SS  
terization results, tested in production at V max. and f  
max.  
DD  
CPU  
4. Data based on characterisation results, not tested in production. All I/O pins in push-pull 0 mode (when applicable) with  
a static value at V or V (no load); clock input (OSC1) driven by external square wave. To obtain the total current  
DD  
SS  
consumption of the device, add the clock source consumption (Section 11.5.3).  
95/140  
1
ST72323  
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
11.4.0.1 Power Consumption vs f  
: 3V ROM Devices  
CPU  
Figure 54. Typical I in RUN mode  
Figure 56. Typical I WAIT mode  
DD  
DD  
8MHz  
3000  
4MHz  
2MHz  
1MHz  
8MHz  
1400  
1200  
1000  
800  
600  
400  
200  
0
2500  
4MHz  
2MHz  
1MHz  
2000  
1500  
1000  
500  
0
2.6  
2.8  
3
3.2  
3.4  
3.6  
2.6  
2.8  
3
3.2  
3.4  
3.6  
Vdd (V)  
Vdd (V)  
Figure 57. Typical I SLOW-WAITmode  
Figure 55. Typical I SLOW mode  
DD  
DD  
140  
120  
100  
80  
500kHz  
250kHz  
125kHz  
62.5kHz  
500kHz  
250  
250kHz  
125kHz  
200  
62.5kHz  
150  
60  
100  
50  
0
40  
20  
0
2.6  
2.8  
3
3.2  
3.4  
3.6  
2.6  
2.8  
3
3.2  
3.4  
3.6  
Vdd (V)  
Vdd (V)  
96/140  
1
ST72323  
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
11.4.0.2 Power Consumption vs f : 5V ROM Devices  
CPU  
Figure 58. Typical I in RUN mode  
Figure 60. Typical I in WAIT mode  
DD  
DD  
8MHz  
8MHz  
4MHz  
2MHz  
1MHz  
2500  
2000  
1500  
1000  
500  
5000  
4MHz  
2MHz  
1MHz  
4000  
3000  
2000  
1000  
0
0
3.8  
4
4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8  
Vdd (V)  
5
5.2 5.4 5.6  
3.8  
4
4.2  
4.4  
4.6 4.8  
Vdd (V)  
5
5.2 5.4  
5.6  
Figure 59. Typical I in SLOW mode  
DD  
Figure 61. Typ. I in SLOW-WAIT mode  
DD  
250  
500kHz  
500  
250kHz  
125kHz  
62.5kHz  
500kHz  
250kHz  
125kHz  
62.5kHz  
200  
150  
100  
50  
400  
300  
200  
100  
0
0
3.8  
4
4.2  
4.4  
4.6  
4.8  
5
5.2  
5.4  
5.6  
3.8  
4
4.2  
4.4  
4.6  
4.8  
5
5.2  
5.4  
5.6  
Vdd (V)  
Vdd (V)  
97/140  
1
ST72323  
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
11.4.1 Supply and Clock Managers  
The previous current consumption specified for the ST7 functional operating modes over temperature  
range does not take into account the clock source current consumption. To get the total device consump-  
tion, the two current values must be added (except for HALT mode).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
I
Supply current of internal RC oscillator  
625  
DD(RCINT)  
see Section  
11.5.3 on page  
101  
µA  
1) & 2)  
I
Supply current of resonator oscillator  
DD(RES)  
Notes:  
1. Data based on characterization results done with the external components specified in Section 11.5.3 , not tested in  
production.  
2. As the oscillator is based on a current source, the consumption does not depend on the voltage.  
98/140  
1
ST72323  
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
11.4.2 On-Chip Peripherals  
T = 25°C f  
=4MHz.  
A
CPU  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
=5.0V  
=3.3V  
=5.0V  
=3.3V  
Typ  
50  
Unit  
V
V
V
V
V
V
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
1)  
I
16-bit Timer supply current  
DD(TIM)  
20  
400  
250  
300  
400  
2)  
I
SPI supply current  
µA  
DD(SPI)  
=5.0V  
=3.3V  
3)  
I
ADC supply current when converting  
DD(ADC)  
Notes:  
1. Data based on a differential I measurement between reset configuration (timer counter running at f  
/4) and timer  
DD  
CPU  
counter stopped (only TIMD bit set). Data valid for one timer.  
2. Data based on a differential I measurement between reset configuration (SPI disabled) and a permanent SPI master  
DD  
communication at maximum speed (data sent equal to 55h). This measurement includes the pad toggling consump-  
tion.  
3. Data based on a differential I measurement between reset configuration and continuous ADC conversion.  
DD  
99/140  
1
ST72323  
11.5 CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T .  
DD CPU  
A
11.5.1 General Timings  
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
2
Typ  
Max  
12  
Unit  
tCPU  
ns  
3
t
Instruction cycle time  
c(INST)  
f
f
=8MHz  
250  
10  
375  
1500  
22  
CPU  
CPU  
2)  
tCPU  
µs  
Interrupt reaction time  
t
v(IT)  
t
= t  
+ 10  
c(INST)  
=8MHz  
1.25  
2.75  
v(IT)  
11.5.2 External Clock Source  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
-1  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
V
OSC1 input pin high level voltage  
OSC1 input pin low level voltage  
V
V
DD  
OSC1H  
DD  
V
V
V
V
+1  
SS  
OSC1L  
SS  
t
t
3)  
w(OSC1H)  
see Figure 62  
OSC1 high or low time  
5
w(OSC1L)  
ns  
t
t
3)  
r(OSC1)  
OSC1 rise or fall time  
15  
1
f(OSC1)  
I
OSC1 Input leakage current  
V
V V  
DD  
µA  
L
SS  
IN  
Figure 62. Typical Application with an External Clock Source  
90%  
V
V
OSC1H  
OSC1L  
10%  
t
t
w(OSC1H)  
t
t
w(OSC1L)  
f(OSC1)  
r(OSC1)  
OSC2  
Not connected internally  
f
OSC  
EXTERNAL  
CLOCK SOURCE  
I
L
OSC1  
ST72XXX  
Notes:  
1. Data based on typical application software.  
2. Time measured between interrupt event and interrupt vector fetch. tc(INST) is the number of tCPU cycles needed to finish  
the current instruction execution.  
3. Data based on design simulation and/or technology characteristics, not tested in production.  
100/140  
1
ST72323  
CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
11.5.3 Crystal and Ceramic Resonator Oscillators  
The ST7 internal clock can be supplied with four  
different Crystal/Ceramic resonator oscillators. All  
the information given in this paragraph are based  
on characterization results with specified typical  
external components. In the application, the reso-  
nator and the load capacitors have to be placed as  
close as possible to the oscillator pins in order to  
minimize output distortion and start-up stabiliza-  
tion time. Refer to the crystal/ceramic resonator  
manufacturer for more details (frequency, pack-  
age, accuracy...).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
1
Max  
16  
Unit  
MHz  
kΩ  
1)  
f
Oscillator Frequency  
OSC  
2)  
R
Feedback resistor  
20  
40  
F
f
f
f
f
= 1 to 2 MHz  
20  
20  
15  
15  
60  
50  
35  
35  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
Recommended load capacitance ver-  
C
C
= 2 to 4 MHz  
= 4 to 8 MHz  
= 8 to 16 MHz  
L1  
L2  
sus equivalent serial resistance of the  
pF  
3)  
crystal or ceramic resonator (R )  
S
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
V =V  
IN  
SS  
80  
150  
250  
460  
910  
f
f
f
f
= 1 to 2 MHz  
= 2 to 4 MHz  
= 4 to 8 MHz  
= 8 to 16 MHz  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
i
OSC2 driving current  
160  
310  
610  
µA  
2
Figure 63. Typical Application with a Crystal or Ceramic Resonator  
WHEN RESONATOR WITH  
INTEGRATED CAPACITORS  
f
OSC  
POWER DOWN  
LOGIC  
C
L1  
OSC1  
LINEAR  
AMPLIFIER  
FEEDBACK  
LOOP  
i
VDD/2  
Ref  
2
RESONATOR  
OSC2  
R
F
C
L2  
ST72XXX  
Notes:  
1. The oscillator selection can be optimized in terms of supply current using an high quality resonator with small RS value.  
Refer to crystal/ceramic resonator manufacturer for more details.  
2. Data based on characterisation results, not tested in production. The relatively low value of the RF resistor, offers a  
good protection against issues resulting from use in a humid environment, due to the induced leakage and the bias con-  
dition change. However, it is recommended to take this point into account if the µC is used in tough humidity conditions.  
3. For C and C it is recommended to use high-quality ceramic capacitors in the 5-pF to 25-pF range (typ.) designed  
L1  
L2  
for high-frequency applications and selected to match the requirements of the crystal or resonator. C and C , are usu-  
L1  
L2  
ally the same size. The crystal manufacturer typically specifies a load capacitance which is the series combination of C  
L1  
and C . PCB and MCU pin capacitance must be included when sizing C and C (10 pF can be used as a rough es-  
L2  
L1  
L2  
timate of the combined pin and board capacitance).  
101/140  
1
ST72323  
CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
Typical Ceramic Resonators  
f
OSC  
Supplier  
Recommended OSCRANGE  
Option bit configuration  
2)  
(MHz)  
Reference  
3)  
2
4
CSTCC2M00G56A-R0  
CSTCR4M00G55B-R0  
CSTCE8M00G52A-R0  
CSTCE16M0V51A-R0  
MP Mode  
MS Mode  
HS Mode  
HS Mode  
8
16  
Notes:  
1. Resonator characteristics given by the ceramic resonator manufacturer.  
2. SMD = [-R0: Plastic tape package (=180mm), -B0: Bulk]  
LEAD = [-A0: Flat pack package (Radial taping Ho= 18mm), -B0: Bulk]  
3. LP mode is not recommended for 2 MHz resonator because the peak to peak amplitude is too small (>0.8V)  
For more information on these resonators, please consult www.murata.com  
11.5.4 RC Oscillators  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
6
Typ  
7
Max  
8
Unit  
T =0-70°C, V =3-3.6V  
MHz  
A
DD  
CPU frequency with internal RC  
oscillator  
T =-10-85°C, V =4.5V-5.5V  
f
6
7
8
A
DD  
CPU (RCINT)  
MHz  
T =-40-125°C, V =4.5V-5.5V  
TBD  
7
TBD  
A
DD  
Note: To reduce disturbance to the RC oscillator, it is recommended to place decoupling capacitors be-  
tween V and V as shown in Figure 85  
DD  
SS  
11.6 MEMORY CHARACTERISTICS  
11.6.1 RAM and Hardware Registers  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
1)  
V
Data retention mode  
HALT mode (or RESET)  
1.6  
V
RM  
Notes:  
1. Minimum V supply voltage without losing data stored in RAM (in HALT mode or under RESET) or in hardware reg-  
DD  
isters (only in HALT mode). Not tested in production.  
102/140  
1
ST72323  
11.7 EMC CHARACTERISTICS  
should be noted that good EMC performance is  
highly dependent on the user application and the  
software in particular.  
Susceptibilitytests are performed on a sample ba-  
sis during product characterization.  
Therefore it is recommended that the user applies  
EMC software optimization and prequalification  
tests in relation with the EMC level requested for  
his application.  
11.7.1 Functional EMS (Electro Magnetic  
Susceptibility)  
Based on a simple running application on the  
product (toggling 2 LEDs through I/O ports), the  
product is stressed by two electro magnetic events  
until a failure occurs (indicated by the LEDs).  
ESD: Electro-Static Discharge (positive and  
negative) is applied on all pins of the device until  
a functional disturbance occurs. This test  
conforms with the IEC 1000-4-2 standard.  
Software recommendations:  
The software flowchart must include the manage-  
ment of runaway conditions such as:  
– Corrupted program counter  
– Unexpected reset  
– Critical Data corruption (control registers...)  
Prequalification trials:  
FTB: A Burst of Fast Transient voltage (positive  
and negative) is applied to V and V through  
DD  
SS  
a 100pF capacitor, until a functional disturbance  
occurs. This test conforms with the IEC 1000-4-  
4 standard.  
Most of the common failures (unexpected reset  
and program counter corruption) can be repro-  
duced by manually forcing a low state on the RE-  
SET pin or the Oscillator pins for 1 second.  
A device reset allows normal operations to be re-  
sumed. The test results are given in the table be-  
low based on the EMS levels and classes defined  
in application note AN1709.  
To complete these trials, ESD stress can be ap-  
plied directly on the device, over the range of  
specification values. When unexpected behaviour  
is detected, the software can be hardened to pre-  
vent unrecoverable errors occurring (see applica-  
tion note AN1015)  
11.7.1.1 Designing hardened software to avoid  
noise problems  
EMC characterization and optimization are per-  
formed at component level with a typical applica-  
tion environment and simplified MCU software. It  
.
Level/  
Class  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
=5V, T =+25°C,  
1)  
Voltage limits to be applied on any I/O pin to induce a  
functional disturbance  
V
DD  
A
V
4A  
FESD  
f
=8MHz conforms to IEC 1000-4-2  
OSC  
Fast transient voltage burst limits to be applied  
V
=5V, T =+25°C, f  
=8MHz  
OSC  
DD  
A
V
through 100pF on V and V pins to induce a func-  
4A  
FFTB  
DD  
DD  
conforms to IEC 1000-4-4  
tional disturbance  
Note:  
1 Design target value only.  
103/140  
1
ST72323  
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
11.7.2 Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI)  
Based on a simple application running on the  
product (toggling 2 LEDs through the I/O ports),  
the product is monitored in terms of emission. This  
emission test is in line with the norm SAE J 1752/  
3 which specifies the board and the loading of  
each pin.  
Max vs. [f  
/f  
]
Monitored  
Frequency Band  
OSC CPU  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Device/ Package  
Unit  
8/4MHz 16/8MHz  
0.1MHz to 30MHz  
30MHz to 130MHz  
130MHz to 1GHz  
SAE EMI Level  
16  
24  
14  
3.0  
12  
23  
15  
3.0  
21  
29  
21  
3.5  
15  
26  
20  
3.5  
dBµV  
LQFP44  
V
=5V,  
DD  
-
dBµV  
-
T =+25°C  
A
S
Peak level  
EMI  
conforming to  
SAE J 1752/3  
0.1MHz to 30MHz  
30MHz to 130MHz  
130MHz to 1GHz  
SAE EMI Level  
LQFP32  
Notes:  
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
2. Refer to Application Note AN1709 for data on other package types.  
104/140  
1
ST72323  
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
11.7.3 Absolute Maximum Ratings (Electrical  
Sensitivity)  
11.7.3.1 Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)  
Electro-Static Discharges (a positive then a nega-  
tive pulse separated by 1 second) are applied to  
the pins of each sample according to each pin  
combination. The sample size depends on the  
number of supply pins in the device (3 parts*(n+1)  
supply pin). Two models can be simulated: Human  
Body Model and Machine Model. This test con-  
forms to the JESD22-A114A/A115A standard.  
Based on three different tests (ESD, LU and DLU)  
using specific measurement methods, the product  
is stressed in order to determine its performance in  
terms of electrical sensitivity. For more details, re-  
fer to the application note AN1181.  
Absolute Maximum Ratings  
1)  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Conditions  
Maximum value  
Unit  
Electro-static discharge voltage  
(Human Body Model)  
T =+25°C  
V
2000  
A
ESD(HBM)  
Electro-static discharge voltage  
(Machine Model)  
T =+25°C  
V
200  
500  
V
A
ESD(MM)  
Electro-static discharge voltage  
(Charged Device Model)  
T =+25°C  
V
A
ESD(CD)  
Notes:  
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
11.7.3.2 Static and Dynamic Latch-Up  
DLU: Electro-Static Discharges (one positive  
then one negative test) are applied to each pin  
of 3 samples when the micro is running to  
assess the latch-up performance in dynamic  
mode. Power supplies are set to the typical  
values, the oscillator is connected as near as  
possible to the pins of the micro and the  
component is put in reset mode. This test  
conforms to the IEC1000-4-2 and SAEJ1752/3  
standards. For more details, refer to the  
application note AN1181.  
LU: 3 complementary static tests are required  
on 10 parts to assess the latch-up performance.  
A supply overvoltage (applied to each power  
supply pin) and a current injection (applied to  
each input, output and configurable I/O pin) are  
performed on each sample. This test conforms  
to the EIA/JESD 78 IC latch-up standard. For  
more details, refer to the application note  
AN1181.  
Electrical Sensitivities  
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Static latch-up class  
Dynamic latch-up class  
Conditions  
Class  
T =+25°C  
A
A
A
A
A
LU  
T =+85°C  
T =+125°C  
A
V
=5.5V, f  
=4MHz, T =+25°C  
OSC A  
DLU  
A
DD  
Notes:  
1. Class description: A Class is an STMicroelectronics internal specification. All its limits are higher than the JEDEC spec-  
ifications, that means when a device belongs to Class A it exceeds the JEDEC standard. B Class strictly covers all the  
JEDEC criteria (international standard).  
105/140  
1
ST72323  
11.8 I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS  
11.8.1 General Characteristics  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
A
DD OSC  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Input low level voltage (standard voltage  
V
0.3xVDD  
V
1)  
IL  
devices)  
1)  
V
Input high level voltage  
0.7xVDD  
IH  
V
2)  
V
Schmitt trigger voltage hysteresis  
0.7  
hys  
3)  
I
Injected Current on other I/O pins  
±4  
±25  
1
INJ(PIN)  
V
V
=5V  
mA  
Total injected current (sum of all I/O and  
control pins)  
DD  
3)  
ΣI  
INJ(PIN)  
I
Input leakage current  
SS VIN V  
DD  
lkg  
µA  
Static current consumption induced by each  
floating input pin  
4)  
I
Floating input mode  
V =V =5V  
200  
S
5)  
R
Weak pull-up equivalent resistor  
V
DD  
50  
1
120  
5
250  
kΩ  
PU  
IN  
SS  
C
I/O pin capacitance  
pF  
IO  
1)  
t
Output high to low level fall time  
C =50pF  
25  
f(IO)out  
L
Between 10% and  
90%  
ns  
1)  
t
Output low to high level rise time  
25  
r(IO)out  
6)  
t
External interrupt pulse time  
t
CPU  
w(IT)in  
Notes:  
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
2. Hysteresis voltage between Schmitt trigger switching levels. Based on characterization results, not tested.  
3. When the current limitation is not possible, the V maximum must be respected, otherwise refer to I  
specifica-  
INJ(PIN)  
IN  
tion. A positive injection is induced by V >V while a negative injection is induced by V <V . Refer to Section 11.2.2  
IN  
DD  
IN  
SS  
on page 92 for more details.  
4. Configuration not recommended, all unused pins must be kept at a fixed voltage: using the output mode of the I/O for  
example and leaving the I/O unconnected on the board or an external pull-up or pull-down resistor (see Figure 64). Data  
based on design simulation and/or technology characteristics, not tested in production.  
5. The R pull-up equivalent resistor is based on a resistive transistor (corresponding I current characteristics de-  
PU  
PU  
scribed in Figure 65).  
6. To generate an external interrupt, a minimum pulse width has to be applied on an I/O port pin configured as an external  
interrupt source.  
Figure 64. Unused I/O Pins configured as input  
Figure 65. Typical I vs. V with V =V  
PU DD IN SS  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
V
DD  
Ta=140°C  
ST7XXX  
Ta=95°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=-45°C  
10kΩ  
UNUSED I/O PORT  
UNUSED I/O PORT  
10kΩ  
ST7XXX  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
6
Vdd(V)  
Note: I/O can be left unconnected if it is configured as output  
(0 or 1) by the software. This has the advantage of  
greater EMC robustness and lower cost.  
106/140  
1
ST72323  
I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
11.8.2 Output Driving Current  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
A
DD CPU  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
I =+5mA  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
Output low level voltage for a standard I/O pin  
when 8 pins are sunk at same time  
(see Figure 66)  
1.2  
IO  
I =+2mA  
0.5  
IO  
1)  
V
OL  
I =+20mA,T 85°C  
1.3  
1.5  
IO  
A
Output low level voltage for a high sink I/O pin  
when 4 pins are sunk at same time  
(see Figure 67 and Figure 69)  
T >85°C  
A
I =+8mA  
0.6  
IO  
I =-5mA, T 85°C  
V
V
-1.4  
IO  
A
Output high level voltage for an I/O pin  
when 4 pins are sourced at same time  
(see Figure 68 and Figure 71)  
DD  
DD  
2)  
-1.6  
T >85°C  
V
A
OH  
I =-2mA  
V
DD  
-0.7  
IO  
V
Output low level voltage for a standard I/O pin  
when 8 pins are sunk at same time  
(see Figure 72 and Figure 75)  
I =+2mA  
0.7  
IO  
1)  
2)  
V
OL  
I =+10mA  
0.7  
0.9  
IO  
Output low level voltage for a high sink I/O pin  
when 4 pins are sunk at same time  
(see Figure 73 and Figure 76)  
I =+14mA,  
IO  
0°C T 70°C  
A
Output high level voltage for an I/O pin  
when 4 pins are sourced at same time  
(see Figure 74 and Figure 77 )  
V
I =-2mA  
V -0.9  
DD  
OH  
IO  
Notes:  
1. The I current sunk must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in Section 11.2.2 and the sum of I  
IO  
IO  
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I  
.
VSS  
2. The I current sourced must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in Section 11.2.2 and the sum of  
IO  
I
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I  
. True open drain I/O pins do not have V  
.
IO  
VDD  
OH  
107/140  
1
ST72323  
11.8.2.1 ST72323 5V devices  
Figure 66. Typical V at V =5V (std. ports)  
Figure 68. Typical V at V =5V  
OH DD  
OL  
DD  
5.5  
1.2  
5
1
4.5  
4
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
3.5  
3
Ta=140°C "  
Vdd=5V 140°C min  
Ta=95°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=-45°C  
Vdd=5v 95°C min  
Vdd=5v 25°C min  
Vdd=5v -45°C min  
2.5  
2
5
10
15
IIO (mA)  
-10  
-8  
-6  
-4  
-2  
0
I
(mA)  
IO
Figure 67. Typ. V at V =5V (high-sink ports)  
OL  
DD  
1
0.9  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
Ta= 140°C  
Ta= 95°C  
Ta= 25°C  
Ta=-45°C  
10  
20  
30  
IIO (mA)  
108/140  
1
ST72323  
I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
Figure 69. Typical V vs. V (std. ports)  
OL  
DD  
1
0.9  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
0.45  
0.4  
Ta= -45°C  
Ta= 25°C  
Ta=-45°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=95°C  
Ta=140°C  
Ta= 95°C  
0.35  
0.3  
Ta= 140°C  
0.25  
0.2  
0.15  
0.1  
0.05  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
6
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
6
Vdd(V)  
Vdd(V)  
Figure 70. Typical V vs. V (high-sink ports)  
OL  
DD  
1.6  
1.4  
1.2  
1
0.6  
Ta= 140°C  
Ta=95°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=-45°C  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
Ta= 140°C  
Ta=95°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=-45°C  
0.1  
0
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
6
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
6
V dd(V )  
Vdd(V )  
Figure 71. Typical V vs. V  
OH  
DD  
5.5  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Ta=-45°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=95°C  
Ta=140°C  
5
4.5  
4
3.5  
3
Ta=-45°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=95°C  
Ta=140°C  
2.5  
2
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
6
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
6
Vdd(V)  
Vdd(V)  
109/140  
1
ST72323  
11.8.2.2 ST72323L 3V devices  
Figure 72. Typical V at V =3V (std. ports)  
Figure 75. Typical V vs. V (std. ports)  
OL DD  
OL  
DD  
Ta=125°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=-45°C  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0.0  
Ta=90°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=-45°C  
0.45  
0.40  
0.35  
0.30  
0.25  
0.20  
0.15  
0.10  
0.05  
0.00  
0
1
2
lIO (mA)  
2.6  
2.8  
3
3.2  
3.4  
3.6  
Vdd (V)  
Figure 73. Typ. V at V =3V (high-sink ports)  
OL  
DD  
Figure 76. Typ. V vs. V ( high-sink ports)  
OL  
DD  
Ta=125°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=-45°C  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0.0  
Ta=90°C  
0.50  
0.40  
0.30  
0.20  
0.10  
0.00  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=-45°C  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2.6  
2.8  
3
3.2  
3.4  
3.6  
lIO (mA)  
Vdd (V)  
Figure 74. Typical V at V =3V  
Figure 77. Typical V vs. V  
DD  
OH  
DD  
OH  
3.1  
3.0  
2.9  
2.8  
2.7  
2.6  
2.5  
2.4  
2.3  
2.2  
3.5  
3.0  
2.5  
2.0  
1.5  
Ta=90°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=-45°C  
Ta=125°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=-45°C  
2.6  
2.8  
3
3.2  
3.4  
3.6  
2
1
0
Vdd (V)  
lIO(mA)  
110/140  
1
ST72323  
11.9 CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS  
11.9.1 Asynchronous RESET Pin  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
A
DD CPU  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
1)  
V
Input low level voltage  
0.3xVDD  
IL  
1)  
V
Input high level voltage  
0.7xVDD  
IH  
V
2)  
V
Schmitt trigger voltage hysteresis  
2.5  
0.2  
2
hys  
3)  
V
Output low level voltage  
V
V
=5V  
=5V  
I =+2mA  
IO  
0.5  
OL  
IO  
DD  
DD  
I
Driving current on RESET pin  
Weak pull-up equivalent resistor  
Generated reset pulse duration  
mA  
kΩ  
µs  
R
20  
20  
30  
30  
120  
ON  
6)  
t
Internal reset sources  
42  
w(RSTL)out  
4)  
t
External reset pulse hold time  
2.5  
µs  
h(RSTL)in  
5)  
t
Filtered glitch duration  
200  
ns  
g(RSTL)in  
Notes:  
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
2. Hysteresis voltage between Schmitt trigger switching levels.  
3. The I current sunk must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in Section 11.2.2 and the sum of I  
IO  
IO  
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I  
.
VSS  
4. To guarantee the reset of the device, a minimum pulse has to be applied to the RESET pin. All short pulses applied on  
the RESET pin with a duration below t can be ignored.  
h(RSTL)in  
5. The reset network (the resistor and two capacitors) protects the device against parasitic resets, especially in noisy en-  
vironments.  
6. Data guaranteed by design, not tested in production.  
111/140  
1
ST72323  
CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
1)2)3)4)  
Figure 78. RESET pin protection  
V
ST72XXX  
DD  
V
DD  
R
ON  
Filter  
4.7kΩ  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
USER  
EXTERNAL  
RESET  
CIRCUIT  
0.01µF  
PULSE  
GENERATOR  
WATCHDOG  
1. The reset network protects the device against parasitic resets.  
2. The output of the external reset circuit must have an open-drain output to drive the ST7 reset pad. Otherwise the device  
can be damaged when the ST7 generates an internal reset (watchdog).  
3. Whatever the reset source is (internal or external), the user must ensure that the level on the RESET pin can go below  
the V max. level specified in Section 11.9.1 . Otherwise the reset will not be taken into account internally.  
IL  
4. Because the reset circuit is designed to allow the internal RESET to be output in the RESET pin, the user must ensure  
that the current sunk on the RESET pin (by an external pull-up or external reset circuit for example) is less than the ab-  
solute maximum value specified for I  
in Section 11.2.2 on page 92.  
INJ(RESET)  
112/140  
1
ST72323  
CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
11.9.2 ICCSEL Pin  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
A
DD CPU  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Max  
0.3xV  
DD  
Unit  
1)  
V
Input low level voltage  
V
SS  
IL  
IH  
L
V
1)  
V
I
Input high level voltage  
Input leakage current  
0.7xV  
V
DD  
DD  
V =V  
1
µA  
IN  
SS  
Notes:  
1. Data based on design simulation and/or technology characteristics, not tested in production.  
113/140  
1
ST72323  
11.10 TIMER PERIPHERAL CHARACTERISTICS  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
A
DD OSC  
Refer to I/O port characteristics for more details on the input/output alternate function characteristics (out-  
put compare, input capture, external clock, PWM output...).  
Data based on design simulation and/or characterisation results, not tested in production.  
11.10.1 16-Bit Timer  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
1
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
t
Input capture pulse time  
t
t
w(ICAP)in  
CPU  
2
CPU  
t
PWM resolution time  
res(PWM)  
f
=8MHz  
250  
0
ns  
CPU  
f
Timer external clock frequency  
PWM repetition rate  
f
f
/4  
MHz  
MHz  
bit  
EXT  
CPU  
f
0
/4  
CPU  
PWM  
Res  
PWM resolution  
16  
PWM  
114/140  
1
ST72323  
11.11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS  
11.11.1 SPI - Serial Peripheral Interface  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified. Data based on  
A
DD CPU  
design simulation and/or characterisation results, not tested in production.  
When no communication is on-going the data output line of the SPI (MOSI in master mode, MISO in slave  
mode) has its alternate function capability released. In this case, the pin status depends on the I/O port  
configuration. Refer to I/O port characteristics for more details on the input/output alternate function char-  
acteristics (SS, SCK, MOSI, MISO).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
/128  
0.0625  
Max  
Unit  
Master  
Slave  
f
f
f
/4  
CPU  
2
CPU  
f
=8MHz  
=8MHz  
f
CPU  
SCK  
MHz  
SPI clock frequency  
1/t  
/2  
c(SCK)  
CPU  
0
f
4
CPU  
t
t
r(SCK)  
SPI clock rise and fall time  
see I/O port pin description  
f(SCK)  
t
SS setup time  
SS hold time  
Slave  
Slave  
120  
120  
su(SS)  
t
h(SS)  
t
t
Master  
Slave  
100  
90  
w(SCKH)  
SCK high and low time  
Data input setup time  
Data input hold time  
w(SCKL)  
t
Master  
Slave  
100  
100  
su(MI)  
t
su(SI)  
ns  
t
Master  
Slave  
100  
100  
h(MI)  
t
h(SI)  
t
Data output access time  
Data output disable time  
Data output valid time  
Data output hold time  
Data output valid time  
Data output hold time  
Slave  
Slave  
0
120  
240  
90  
a(SO)  
t
dis(SO)  
t
v(SO)  
h(SO)  
v(MO)  
h(MO)  
Slave (after enable edge)  
t
0
t
0.25  
0.25  
Master (before capture edge)  
t
CPU  
t
Figure 79. SPI Slave Timing Diagram with CPHA=0 1)  
SS  
INPUT  
t
t
su(SS)  
c(SCK)  
t
h(SS)  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=0  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=1  
t
t
w(SCKH)  
w(SCKL)  
t
t
t
t
dis(SO)  
a(SO)  
v(SO)  
h(SO)  
t
t
r(SCK)  
f(SCK)  
see  
note 2  
MISO  
OUTPUT  
MSB OUT  
see note 2  
BIT6 OUT  
LSB OUT  
t
t
h(SI)  
su(SI)  
MSB IN  
LSB IN  
BIT1 IN  
MOSI  
INPUT  
Notes:  
1. Measurement points are done at CMOS levels: 0.3xV and 0.7xV  
.
DD  
DD  
115/140  
1
ST72323  
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
Figure 80. SPI Slave Timing Diagram with CPHA=11)  
SS  
INPUT  
t
t
su(SS)  
c(SCK)  
t
h(SS)  
CPHA=1  
CPOL=0  
CPHA=1  
CPOL=1  
t
t
w(SCKH)  
w(SCKL)  
t
t
dis(SO)  
a(SO)  
t
t
h(SO)  
v(SO)  
t
t
r(SCK)  
f(SCK)  
see  
note 2  
see  
note 2  
MISO  
OUTPUT  
MSB OUT  
BIT6 OUT  
HZ  
LSB OUT  
t
t
h(SI)  
su(SI)  
MSB IN  
LSB IN  
BIT1 IN  
MOSI  
INPUT  
Figure 81. SPI Master Timing Diagram 1)  
SS  
INPUT  
t
c(SCK)  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=0  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=1  
CPHA=1  
CPOL=0  
CPHA=1  
CPOL=1  
t
t
w(SCKH)  
w(SCKL)  
t
t
r(SCK)  
f(SCK)  
t
t
h(MI)  
su(MI)  
MISO  
MOSI  
INPUT  
MSB IN  
h(MO)  
BIT6 IN  
LSB IN  
t
t
v(MO)  
MSB OUT  
LSB OUT  
see note 2  
BIT6 OUT  
see note 2  
OUTPUT  
Notes:  
1. Measurement points are done at CMOS levels: 0.3xV and 0.7xV  
.
DD  
DD  
2. When no communication is on-going the data output line of the SPI (MOSI in master mode, MISO in slave mode) has  
its alternate function capability released. In this case, the pin status depends of the I/O port configuration.  
116/140  
1
ST72323  
11.12 10-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
DD CPU  
Conditions  
4MHz  
A
Symbol  
Parameter  
ADC clock frequency  
Min  
0.4  
3.8  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
f
f
4
MHz  
ADC  
CPU  
V
Analog reference voltage  
Conversion voltage range  
0.7*V V  
V  
V
AREF  
DD  
AREF  
DD  
DD  
V
1)  
V
V
V
AREF  
AIN  
SSA  
-40°CT ≤+85°C  
250  
nA  
Positive input leakage current for analog  
input  
A
+85°CT ≤+125°C  
1
µA  
A
I
lkg  
V <V | I |< 400µA  
IN  
SS, IN  
Negative input leakage current on ro-  
bust analog pins  
on adjacent robust ana-  
log pin  
5
6
µA  
R
C
External input impedance  
see  
Figure 82  
and  
kΩ  
AIN  
AIN  
External capacitor on analog input  
pF  
f
Variation freq. of analog input signal  
Internal sample and hold capacitor  
Hz  
pF  
Figure 83  
AIN  
C
12  
ADC  
Conversion time (Sample+Hold) f  
=4  
CPU  
t
t
MHz, MAX_SPEED= 1, SPEED=1  
=4MHz  
3.75  
µs  
ADC  
f
ADC  
- No of sample capacitor loading cycles  
- No. of Hold conversion cycles  
4
11  
1/f  
ADC  
ADC  
Notes:  
1. Any added external serial resistor will downgrade the ADC accuracy (especially for resistance greater than 10k). Data  
based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
117/140  
1
ST72323  
ADC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
1)  
2)  
Figure 82. R  
max. vs f  
with C =0pF  
Figure 83. Recommended C  
& R  
AIN AIN values.  
AIN  
ADC  
AIN  
45  
40  
35  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
1000  
Cain 10 nF  
Cain 22 nF  
Cain 47 nF  
2 MHz  
1 MHz  
100  
10  
1
0
0.1  
0
10  
30  
70  
0.01  
0.1  
1
10  
CPARASITIC (pF)  
fAIN(KHz)  
Figure 84. Typical A/D Converter Application  
V
DD  
ST72XXX  
V
T
0.6V  
R
2kΩ(max)  
AIN  
AINx  
10-Bit A/D  
V
AIN  
Conversion  
C
V
0.6V  
AIN  
T
I
C
ADC  
12pF  
L
1µA  
Notes:  
1. C  
represents the capacitance of the PCB (dependent on soldering and PCB layout quality) plus the pad ca-  
PARASITIC  
pacitance (3pF). A high C  
value will downgrade conversion accuracy. To remedy this, f  
should be reduced.  
PARASITIC  
ADC  
2. This graph shows that depending on the input signal variation (f ), C  
can be increased for stabilization time and  
AIN  
AIN  
decreased to allow the use of a larger serial resistor (R  
.
AIN)  
118/140  
1
ST72323  
ADC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
11.12.1 Analog Power Supply and Reference  
Pins  
digital ground plane via a single point on the  
PCB.  
Depending on the MCU pin count, the package  
– Filter power to the analog power planes. It is rec-  
ommended to connect capacitors, with good high  
frequency characteristics, between the power  
and ground lines, placing 0.1µF and optionally, if  
needed 10pF capacitors as close as possible to  
the ST7 power supply pins and a 1 to 10µF ca-  
pacitor close to the power source (see Figure  
85).  
may feature separate V  
and V  
analog  
AREF  
SSA  
power supply pins. These pins supply power to the  
A/D converter cell and function as the high and low  
reference voltages for the conversion. In some  
packages, V  
and V  
pins are not available  
AREF  
SSA  
(refer to Section 2 on page 7). In this case the an-  
alog supply and reference pads are internally  
bonded to the V and V pins.  
DD  
SS  
– The analog and digital power supplies should be  
connected in a star nework. Do not use a resis-  
Separation of the digital and analog power pins al-  
low board designers to improve A/D performance.  
Conversion accuracy can be impacted by voltage  
drops and noise in the event of heavily loaded or  
badly decoupled power supply lines (see Section  
11.12.2 General PCB Design Guidelines).  
tor, as V  
is used as a reference voltage by  
AREF  
the A/D converter and any resistance would  
cause a voltage drop and a loss of accuracy.  
– Properly place components and route the signal  
traces on the PCB to shield the analog inputs.  
Analog signals paths should run over the analog  
ground plane and be as short as possible. Isolate  
analog signals from digital signals that may  
switch while the analog inputs are being sampled  
by the A/D converter. Do not toggle digital out-  
puts on the same I/O port as the A/D input being  
converted.  
11.12.2 General PCB Design Guidelines  
To obtain best results, some general design and  
layout rules should be followed when designing  
the application PCB to shield the noise-sensitive,  
analog physical interface from noise-generating  
CMOS logic signals.  
– Use separate digital and analog planes. The an-  
alog ground plane should be connected to the  
Figure 85. Power Supply Filtering  
ST72XXX  
1 to 10µF  
0.1µF  
V
V
SS  
DD  
ST7  
DIGITAL NOISE  
FILTERING  
V
DD  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
SOURCE  
0.1µF  
V
V
AREF  
SSA  
EXTERNAL  
NOISE  
FILTERING  
119/140  
1
ST72323  
10-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
11.12.3 ADC Accuracy  
VDD=3V  
VDD=5V  
Symbol  
|E |  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Unit  
Max  
Max  
Typ  
3
Typ  
3
1)  
4
3
3
4
3
3
Total unadjusted error  
T
1)  
2
2
|E |  
Offset error  
O
1)  
0.5  
0.5  
|E |  
Gain Error  
G
LSB  
Differential linearity error CPU in run mode @ f  
4
4
ADC  
ADC  
1.5  
1.5  
3
3
1
1
2
2
|E |  
1)  
D
MHz.  
CPU in run mode @ f  
MHz.  
1)  
|E |  
Integral linearity error  
L
Notes:  
1. Design target values.  
Figure 86. ADC Accuracy Characteristics  
Digital Result ADCDR  
E
G
(1) Example of an actual transfer curve  
(2) The ideal transfer curve  
(3) End point correlation line  
1023  
V
V  
1022  
1021  
AREF  
SSA  
1LSB  
= --------------------------------------------  
IDEAL  
1024  
(2)  
E =Total Unadjusted Error: maximum deviation  
T
E
between the actual and the ideal transfer curves.  
T
(3)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
E =Offset Error: deviation between the first actual  
O
transition and the first ideal one.  
(1)  
E =Gain Error: deviation between the last ideal  
G
transition and the last actual one.  
E
E
O
L
E =Differential Linearity Error: maximum deviation  
D
between actual steps and the ideal one.  
E =Integral Linearity Error: maximum deviation  
L
E
between any actual transition and the end point  
correlation line.  
D
1 LSB  
IDEAL  
V
(LSB  
)
in  
IDEAL  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1021 1022 1023 1024  
V
V
SSA  
AREF  
120/140  
1
ST72323  
12 PACKAGE CHARACTERISTICS  
12.1 PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA  
Figure 87. 48-Pin Low profile Quad Flat Package  
mm  
inches  
Dim.  
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max  
D
A
A
1.60  
0.063  
0.006  
D1  
A2  
A1 0.05  
0.15 0.002  
A2 1.35 1.40 1.45 0.053 0.055 0.057  
A1  
b
C
0.17 0.22 0.27 0.007 0.009 0.011  
0.09 0.20 0.004 0.008  
b
D
9.00  
7.00  
9.00  
7.00  
0.50  
3.5°  
0.354  
0.276  
0.354  
0.276  
0.020  
3.5°  
D1  
E
e
E1  
E
E1  
e
θ
0°  
7°  
0°  
7°  
c
L1  
L
0.45 0.60 0.75 0.018 0.024 0.030  
1.00 0.039  
Number of Pins  
48  
L
θ
L1  
N
Figure 88. 44-Pin Low profile Quad Flat Package  
mm  
inches  
Dim.  
A
D
D1  
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max  
A2  
A
1.60  
0.063  
0.006  
A1 0.05  
0.15 0.002  
A1  
b
A2 1.35 1.40 1.45 0.053 0.055 0.057  
b
C
0.30 0.37 0.45 0.012 0.015 0.018  
0.09  
0.20 0.004 0.000 0.008  
D
12.00  
10.00  
12.00  
10.00  
0.80  
0.472  
0.394  
0.472  
0.394  
0.031  
e
D1  
E
E1  
E
E1  
e
θ
0°  
3.5°  
7°  
0°  
3.5°  
7°  
L
0.45 0.60 0.75 0.018 0.024 0.030  
1.00 0.039  
Number of Pins  
44  
c
L1  
L1  
L
h
N
121/140  
1
ST72323  
Figure 89. 32-Pin Low profile Quad Flat Package  
mm  
inches  
Dim.  
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max  
D
A
1.60  
0.063  
0.006  
A
D1  
A2  
A1 0.05  
0.15 0.002  
A2 1.35 1.40 1.45 0.053 0.055 0.057  
A1  
b
C
0.30 0.37 0.45 0.012 0.015 0.018  
0.09 0.20 0.004 0.008  
e
b
D
9.00  
7.00  
9.00  
7.00  
0.80  
3.5°  
0.354  
0.276  
0.354  
0.276  
0.031  
3.5°  
D1  
E
E1  
E
E1  
e
θ
0°  
7°  
0°  
7°  
c
L1  
L
0.45 0.60 0.75 0.018 0.024 0.030  
1.00 0.039  
Number of Pins  
32  
L
L1  
h
N
Figure 90. 34-Pin Plastic Small Outline Package, Shrink 300-mil Width  
mm  
inches  
Dim.  
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max  
h x 45×  
L
A
2.464  
2.642 0.097  
0.292 0.005  
0.483 0.014  
0.318 0.009  
0.104  
0.012  
0.019  
0.013  
A
C
A1  
A1 0.127  
a
B
C
0.356  
0.231  
e
B
D
17.72  
9
18.05  
0.698  
9
D
0.711  
0.299  
E
e
7.417  
7.595 0.292  
1.016  
0.040  
10.16  
0
10.41  
0.400  
4
H
0.410  
E
H
h
α
L
0.635  
0°  
0.737 0.025  
0.029  
8°  
8°  
0°  
0.610  
1.016 0.024  
0.040  
Number of Pins  
N
34  
122/140  
1
ST72323  
PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA (Cont’d)  
Figure 91. 32-Pin Plastic Dual In-Line Package, Shrink 400-mil Width  
mm  
inches  
Dim.  
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max  
E
eC  
A
3.56 3.76 5.08 0.140 0.148 0.200  
A1 0.51  
A2 3.05 3.56 4.57 0.120 0.140 0.180  
0.36 0.46 0.58 0.014 0.018 0.023  
b1 0.76 1.02 1.40 0.030 0.040 0.055  
0.020  
A2  
A
L
b
A1  
E1  
C
eA  
eB  
C
D
E
0.20 0.25 0.36 0.008 0.010 0.014  
27.43 28.45 1.080 1.100 1.120  
9.91 10.41 11.05 0.390 0.410 0.435  
b
b2  
e
D
E1 7.62 8.89 9.40 0.300 0.350 0.370  
e
1.78  
0.070  
0.400  
eA  
eB  
eC  
L
10.16  
12.70  
1.40  
0.500  
0.055  
2.54 3.05 3.81 0.100 0.120 0.150  
Number of Pins  
N
32  
12.2 THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Value  
Unit  
Package thermal resistance (junction to ambient)  
LQFP48 7x7  
80  
52  
70  
50  
R
LQFP44 10x10  
LQFP32 7x7  
SDIP32 200 mil  
°C/W  
thJA  
1)  
P
Power dissipation  
Maximum junction temperature  
500  
150  
mW  
°C  
D
2)  
T
Jmax  
Notes:  
1. The power dissipation is obtained from the formula P =P +P  
where P  
is the chip internal power (I xV  
)
D
INT  
PORT  
INT  
DD DD  
and P  
is the port power dissipation determined by the user.  
PORT  
2. The average chip-junction temperature can be obtained from the formula T = T + P x RthJA.  
J
A
D
123/140  
1
ST72323  
12.3 SOLDERING INFORMATION  
In accordance with the RoHS European directive,  
all STMicroelectronics packages will be converted  
Backward and forward compatibility:  
The main difference between Pb and Pb-free sol-  
dering process is the temperature range.  
in 2005 to lead-free technology, named ECO-  
TM  
PACK  
(for a detailed roadmap, please refer to  
TM  
– ECOPACK LQFP, SDIP and SO packages  
PCN CRP/04/744 "Lead-free Conversion Program  
- Compliance with RoHS", issued November 18th,  
2004).  
are fully compatible with Lead (Pb) containing  
soldering process (see application note AN2034)  
TM  
– LQFP, SDIP and SO Pb-packages are compati-  
ble with Lead-free soldering process, neverthe-  
less it's the customer's duty to verify that the Pb-  
packages maximum temperature (mentioned on  
the Inner box label) is compatible with their Lead-  
free soldering temperature.  
ECOPACK packages are qualified according  
to the JEDEC STD-020B compliant soldering  
profile.  
Detailed information on the STMicroelectronic  
TM  
ECOPACK transition program is available on  
www.st.com/stonline/leadfree/, with specific  
technical Application notes covering the main  
technical aspects related to lead-free  
conversion (AN2033, AN2034, AN2035,  
AN2036).  
Table 22. Soldering Compatibility (wave and reflow soldering process)  
Package  
SDIP & PDIP  
LQFP and SO  
Plating material devices  
Sn (pure Tin)  
NiPdAu (Nickel-palladium-Gold)  
Pb solder paste  
Pb-free solder paste  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes *  
Yes *  
* Assemblers must verify that the Pb-package maximum temperature (mentioned on the Inner box label)  
is compatible with their Lead-free soldering process.  
124/140  
1
ST72323  
13 ST72323 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION  
The device is available for development in a user  
programmable compatible version (ST72F324B  
FLASH). FLASH devices are shipped to custom-  
ers with a default content (FFh), while ROM facto-  
ry coded parts contain the code supplied by the  
customer. This implies that FLASH devices have  
to be configured by the customer using the Option  
Bytes while the ROM devices are factory-config-  
ured.  
13.1 FLASH OPTION BYTES (ST72F324B compatible superset)  
STATIC OPTION BYTE 0  
STATIC OPTION BYTE 1  
7
0
7
0
WDG  
OSCTYPE  
OSCRANGE  
Reserved  
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
2
1
Default  
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
The option bytes allows the hardware configura-  
tion of the microcontroller to be selected. They  
have no address in the memory map and can be  
accessed only in programming mode (for example  
using a standard ST7 programming tool). The de-  
fault content of the FLASH is fixed to FFh. To pro-  
gram directly the FLASH devices using ICP,  
FLASH devices are shipped to customers with the  
internal RC clock source. In masked ROM devic-  
es, the option bytes are fixed in hardware by the  
ROM code (see option list).  
OPT6= WDG SW Hardware or software watchdog  
This option bit selects the watchdog type.  
0: Hardware (watchdog always enabled)  
1: Software (watchdog to be enabled by software)  
OPT5:1 = Reserved, must be kept at default value.  
OPT0= FMP_R Flash memory read-out protection  
Read-out protection, when selected, provides a  
protection against Program Memory content ex-  
traction and against write access to Flash memo-  
ry.  
OPTION BYTE 0  
OPT7= WDG HALT Watchdog reset on HALT  
This option bit determines if a RESET is generated  
when entering HALT mode while the Watchdog is  
active.  
0: No Reset generation when entering Halt mode  
1: Reset generation when entering Halt mode  
Erasing the option bytes when the FMP_R option  
is selected causes the whole user memory to be  
erased first, and the device can be reprogrammed.  
Refer to the ST72F324B datasheet and the ST7  
Flash Programming Reference Manual for more  
details.  
0: Read-out protection enabled  
1: Read-out protection disabled  
125/140  
1
ST72323  
ST72323 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont’d)  
OPTION BYTE 1  
Note 1: The RCosc frequency in ST72F324B  
Flash devices is centered on 3.5 MHz.  
OPT7= PKG1 Pin package selection bit  
This option bit selects the package.  
(f  
=1.75MHz). For ROM ST72323 devices refer  
CPU  
to Section 11.5.4.  
Version  
Selected Package  
LQFP48/LQFP44  
PKG1  
OPT3:1 = OSCRANGE[2:0] Oscillator range  
When the resonator oscillator type is selected,  
these option bits select the resonator oscillator  
current source corresponding to the frequency  
range of the used resonator. Otherwise, these bits  
are used to select the normal operating frequency  
J
1
0
K
LQFP32 / SDIP32 / SO34  
Note: On the chip, each I/O port has 8 pads. Pads  
that are not bonded to external pins are in input  
pull-up configuration after reset. The configuration  
of these pads must be kept at reset state to avoid  
added current consumption.  
range.  
OSCRANGE  
Typ. Freq. Range  
2
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
LP  
1~2MHz  
2~4MHz  
4~8MHz  
8~16MHz  
OPT6 = RSTC RESET clock cycle selection  
This option bit selects the number of CPU cycles  
applied during the RESET phase and when exiting  
HALT mode. For resonator oscillators, it is advised  
to select 4096 due to the long crystal stabilization  
time.  
MP  
MS  
HS  
0: Reset phase with 4096 CPU cycles  
1: Reset phase with 256 CPU cycles  
OPT0 = Reserved, must be kept at default value.  
OPT5:4 = OSCTYPE[1:0] Oscillator Type  
These option bits select the ST7 main clock  
source type.  
OSCTYPE  
Clock Source  
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
Resonator Oscillator  
Reserved  
1)  
Internal RC Oscillator  
External Source  
126/140  
1
ST72323  
ST72323 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont’d)  
13.2 ROM DEVICE ORDERING INFORMATION AND TRANSFER OF CUSTOMER CODE  
ROM devices can be ordered in any combination  
of memory size and temperature range with the  
types given in Figure 92 and by completing the op-  
tion list on the next page. ROM customer code is  
made up of the ROM contents and the list of the  
selected options (if any). The ROM contents are to  
be sent with the S19 hexadecimal file generated  
by the development tool. All unused bytes must be  
set to FFh.  
Refer to application note AN1635 for information  
on the counter listing returned by ST after code  
has been transferred.  
The STMicroelectronics Sales Organization will be  
pleased to provide detailed information on con-  
tractual points.  
Figure 92. ROM Factory Coded Device Types  
/
XXX  
PACKAGE VERSION  
DEVICE  
Code name (defined by STMicroelectronics)  
1= Standard 0 to +70 °C  
7= Standard -40 to +105 °C  
5= Standard -10 to +85 °C  
6= Standard -40 to +85 °C  
3= Standard -40 to +125 °C  
A = Automotive -40 to +85 °C  
B = Automotive -40 to +105 °C  
C = Automotive -40 to +125 °C  
T= Low Profile Quad Flat Pack (LQFP)  
B= Plastic Dual in Line (DIP)  
M= Small Outline (SO)  
ST72323K2, ST72323J2, ST72323C2  
ST72323K1, ST72323J1, ST72323C1  
127/140  
1
ST72323  
ST72323 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont’d)  
ST72323 5V MICROCONTROLLER OPTION LIST  
(Last updated April 2006)  
Customer:  
Address:  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Contact:  
Phone No:  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Reference/ROM Code* : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
*The ROM code name is assigned by STMicroelectronics.  
ROM code must be sent in .S19 format. .Hex extension cannot be processed.  
Device Type/Memory Size/Package (check only one option):  
---------------------------------  
-------------------------------------  
-------------------------------------  
||  
||  
||  
ROM DEVICE:  
4K  
8K  
-------------------------------------  
---------------------------------  
-------------------------------------  
LQFP32:  
LQFP44:  
LQFP48 :  
SDIP32:  
SO34:  
|
|
|
|
|
[ ] ST72323K1T  
[ ] ST72323J1T  
[ ] ST72323C1T  
[ ] ST72323K1B  
[ ] ST72323J1M  
|
|
|
|
|
[ ] ST72323K2T  
[ ] ST72323J2T  
[ ] ST72323C2T  
[ ] ST72323J2B  
[ ] ST72323J2M  
|
|
|
|
|
---------------------------------  
---------------------------------------  
---------------------------------------  
DIE FORM:  
||  
4K  
||  
8K  
||  
---------------------------------  
---------------------------------------  
---------------------------------------  
32-pin:  
44-pin:  
|
|
[ ]  
[ ]  
|
|
[ ]  
[ ]  
|
|
Conditioning (check only one option):  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
-----------------------------------------------------  
-----------------------------------------------------  
|
|
Packaged Product  
Die Product (dice tested at 25°C only)  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
LQFP  
DIP  
[ ] Tray  
[ ] Tube  
[ ] Tape & Reel  
|
|
|
|
[ ] Tape & Reel  
[ ] Inked wafer  
[ ] Sawn wafer on sticky foil  
[ ] Waffle pack  
Power Supply Range:  
[ ] 3.8 to 5.5V  
Version/Temp. Range (do not check for die product). Please refer to datasheet for specific sales conditions:  
----------------------- -------------------- ---------------------------------------  
|
||  
Standard  
Automotive  
Temp. Range  
----------------------- -------------------- ---------------------------------------  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
0°C to +70°C  
-10°C to +85°C  
-40°C to +85°C  
-40°C to +105°C  
-40°C to +125°C  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
Special Marking:  
[ ] No [ ] Yes "_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ " (LQFP32 & LQFP48 7 char., other pkg. 10 char. max)  
Authorized characters are letters, digits, '.', '-', '/' and spaces only.  
Clock Source Selection:  
[ ] Resonator:  
[ ] LP: Low power resonator (1 to 2 MHz)  
[ ] MP: Medium power resonator (2 to 4 MHz)  
[ ] MS: Medium speed resonator (4 to 8 MHz)  
[ ] HS: High speed resonator (8 to 16 MHz)  
[ ] Internal RC:  
[ ] External Clock  
Reset Delay  
[ ] 256 Cycles  
[ ] 4096 Cycles  
Watchdog Selection:  
Watchdog Reset on Halt:  
[ ] Software Activation  
[ ] Reset  
[ ] Hardware Activation  
[ ] No Reset  
Readout Protection:  
[ ] Disabled  
[ ] Enabled  
Date  
Signature  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
128/140  
1
ST72323  
ST72323 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont’d)  
ST72323L 3V MICROCONTROLLER OPTION LIST  
(Last updated April 2006)  
Customer:  
Address:  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Contact:  
Phone No:  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Reference/ROM Code* : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
*The ROM code name is assigned by STMicroelectronics.  
ROM code must be sent in .S19 format. .Hex extension cannot be processed.  
Device Type/Memory Size/Package (check only one option):  
---------------------------------  
-------------------------------------  
-------------------------------------  
||  
||  
||  
ROM DEVICE:  
4K  
8K  
-------------------------------------  
---------------------------------  
-------------------------------------  
LQFP32:  
LQFP44:  
LQFP48 :  
SDIP32:  
SO34:  
|
|
|
|
|
[ ] ST72323LK1T  
[ ] ST72323LJ1T  
[ ] ST72323LC1T  
[ ] ST72323LK1B  
[ ] ST72323LJ1M  
|
|
|
|
|
[ ] ST72323LK2T  
[ ] ST72323LJ2T  
[ ] ST72323LC2T  
[ ] ST72323LJ2B  
[ ] ST72323LJ2M  
|
|
|
|
|
---------------------------------  
---------------------------------------  
---------------------------------------  
DIE FORM:  
||  
4K  
||  
8K  
||  
---------------------------------  
---------------------------------------  
---------------------------------------  
32-pin:  
44-pin:  
|
|
[ ]  
[ ]  
|
|
[ ]  
[ ]  
|
|
Conditioning (check only one option):  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
-----------------------------------------------------  
-----------------------------------------------------  
|
|
Packaged Product  
Die Product (dice tested at 25°C only)  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
LQFP  
DIP  
[ ] Tray  
[ ] Tube  
[ ] Tape & Reel  
|
|
|
|
[ ] Tape & Reel  
[ ] Inked wafer  
[ ] Sawn wafer on sticky foil  
[ ] Waffle pack  
Power Supply Range:  
[ ] 2.85 to 3.6V  
Version/Temp. Range (do not check for die product). Please refer to datasheet for specific sales conditions:  
----------------------- -------------------- ---------------------------------------  
|
||  
Standard  
Automotive  
Temp. Range  
----------------------- -------------------- ---------------------------------------  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
|
|
|
|
|
|
0°C to +70°C  
-10°C to +85°C  
-40°C to +85°C  
[ ]  
Special Marking:  
[ ] No [ ] Yes "_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ " (LQFP32 & LQFP48 7 char., other pkg. 10 char. max)  
Authorized characters are letters, digits, '.', '-', '/' and spaces only.  
Clock Source Selection:  
[ ] Resonator:  
[ ] LP: Low power resonator (1 to 2 MHz)  
[ ] MP: Medium power resonator (2 to 4 MHz)  
[ ] MS: Medium speed resonator (4 to 8 MHz)  
[ ] HS: High speed resonator (8 to 16 MHz)  
[ ] Internal RC:  
[ ] External Clock  
Reset Delay  
[ ] 256 Cycles  
[ ] 4096 Cycles  
Watchdog Selection:  
Watchdog Reset on Halt:  
[ ] Software Activation  
[ ] Reset  
[ ] Hardware Activation  
[ ] No Reset  
Readout Protection:  
[ ] Disabled  
[ ] Enabled  
Date  
Signature  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Please download the latest version of this option list from:  
http://www.st.com/mcu > downloads > ST7 microcontrollers > Option list  
129/140  
1
ST72323  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont’d)  
13.3 VERSION-SPECIFIC SALES CONDITIONS  
To satisfy the different customer requirements and  
to ensure that ST Standard Microcontrollers will  
consistently meet or exceed the expectations of  
each Market Segment, the Codification System for  
Standard Microcontrollers clearly distinguishes  
products intended for use in automotive environ-  
ments, from products intended for use in non-auto-  
motive environments.  
It is the responsibility of the Customer to select the  
appropriate product for his application.  
13.4 ORDERING INFORMATION FOR COMPATIBLE FLASH DEVICES  
Table 23. Standard and Industrial ST72F324B compatible Flash Order Codes  
Part Number  
ST72F324BK2T6  
ST72F324BK2T5  
ST72F324BK2T3  
ST72F324BK2B6  
ST72F324BK2B5  
ST72F324BK2M6  
ST72F324BK2M5  
ST72F324BJ2T6  
ST72F324BJ2T5  
ST72F324BJ2T3  
ST72F324BC2T6  
ST72F324BC2T5  
ST72F324BC2T3  
Package  
Flash Memory (KBytes)  
Temp. Range  
-40°C +85°C  
-10°C +85°C  
-40°C +125°C  
-40°C +85°C  
-10°C +85°C  
-40°C +85°C  
--10°C +85°C  
-40°C +85°C  
-10°C +85°C  
-40°C +125°C  
-40°C +85°C  
-10°C +85°C  
-40°C +125°C  
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
LQFP32  
SDIP32  
SO34  
LQFP44  
LQFP48  
130/140  
1
ST72323  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont’d)  
Table 24. Automotive Flash Order Codes  
Part Number  
ST72F324BK2TA  
ST72F324BK2TC  
ST72F324BJ2TA  
ST72F324BJ2TC  
Package  
Flash Memory (KBytes)  
Temp. Range  
8
8
8
8
-40°C +85°C  
-40°C +125°C  
-40°C +85°C  
-40°C +125°C  
LQFP32  
LQFP44  
131/140  
1
ST72323  
13.5 DEVELOPMENT TOOLS  
Two configurations are available from ST:  
STXF521-IND/USB: Low-cost In-Circuit  
STMicroelectronics offers a range of hardware  
and software development tools for the ST7 micro-  
controller family. Full details of tools available for  
the ST7 from third party manufacturers can be ob-  
tain from the STMicroelectronics Internet site:  
http//:mcu.st.com.  
Debugging kit from Softec Microsystems.  
Includes STX-InDART/USB board (USB port)  
and a specific demo board for ST72521  
(LQFP64)  
STxF-INDART  
Flash Programming tools  
Tools from these manufacturers include C compli-  
ers, emulators and gang programmers.  
ST7-STICK ST7 In-circuit Communication Kit, a  
complete software/hardware package for  
programming ST7 Flash devices. It connects to  
a host PC parallel port and to the target board or  
socket board via ST7 ICC connector.  
Emulators  
Two types of emulators are available from ST for  
the ST72324 family:  
ST7 DVP3 entry-level emulator offers a flexible  
and modular debugging and programming  
solution. SDIP32 probes/adapters are included,  
other packages need a specific connection kit  
(refer to Table 25)  
ST7 EMU3 high-end emulator is delivered with  
everything (probes, TEB, adapters etc.) needed  
to start emulating the ST72324 family. To  
configure it to emulate other ST7 subfamily  
devices, the active probe for the ST7EMU3 can  
be changed and the ST7EMU3 probe is  
designed for easy interchange of TEBs (Target  
Emulation Board). See Table 25.  
ICC Socket Boards provide an easy to use and  
flexible means of programming ST7 Flash  
devices. They can be connected to any tool that  
supports the ST7 ICC interface, such as ST7  
EMU3, ST7-DVP3, inDART, ST7-STICK, or  
many third-party development tools.  
Evaluation board  
ST7232x-EVAL with ICC connector for  
programming capability. Provides direct  
connection to ST7-DVP3 emulator. Supplied  
with daughter boards (core module) for  
ST72F321, ST72F324  
&
ST72F521 (the  
ST72F321 & ST72F324 chips are not included)  
In-circuit Debugging Kit  
Table 25. STMicroelectronics Development Tools  
Emulation  
Programming  
Supported  
Products  
ST7 DVP3 Series  
ST7 EMU3 series  
ICC Socket Board  
Active Probe &  
Emulator  
Connection kit  
Emulator  
T.E.B.  
ST72324BJ,  
ST72F324J,  
ST72F324BJ  
ST7MDT20-T44/  
DVP  
ST7MDT20-DVP3  
ST7MDT20J-  
EMU3  
1
ST7MDT20J-TEB  
ST7SB20J/xx  
ST72324BK,  
ST72F324K,  
ST72F324BK  
ST7MDT20-T32/  
DVP  
ST7MDT20-DVP3  
Note 1: Add suffix /EU, /UK, /US for the power supply of your region.  
132/140  
1
ST72323  
13.5.1  
Socket  
and  
Emulator  
Adapter  
Information  
For information on the type of socket that is sup-  
plied with the emulator, refer to the suggested list  
of sockets in Table 26.  
Note: Before designing the board layout, it is rec-  
ommended to check the overall dimensions of the  
socket as they may be greater than the dimen-  
sions of the device.  
For footprint and other mechanical information  
about these sockets and adapters, refer to the  
manufacturer’s datasheet (www.yamaichi.de for  
LQFP44 10 x 10 and www.ironwoodelectron-  
ics.com for LQFP32 7 x 7).  
Table 26. Suggested List of Socket Types  
Socket (supplied with  
ST7MDT20J-EMU3)  
Emulator Adapter (supplied with  
ST7MDT20J-EMU3)  
Device  
LQFP32 7 X 7  
IRONWOOD SF-QFE32SA-L-01  
YAMAICHI IC149-044-*52-*5  
IRONWOOD SK-UGA06/32A-01  
YAMAICHI ICP-044-5  
LQFP44 10 X10  
133/140  
1
ST72323  
13.6 ST7 APPLICATION NOTES  
Table 27. ST7 Application Notes  
IDENTIFICATION DESCRIPTION  
APPLICATION EXAMPLES  
AN1658  
AN1720  
AN1755  
SERIAL NUMBERING IMPLEMENTATION  
MANAGING THE READ-OUT PROTECTION IN FLASH MICROCONTROLLERS  
A HIGH RESOLUTION/PRECISION THERMOMETER USING ST7 AND NE555  
EXAMPLE DRIVERS  
AN 969  
AN 970  
AN 972  
AN 973  
AN 974  
AN 976  
AN 979  
AN 980  
AN1041  
AN1044  
AN1046  
AN1047  
AN1048  
AN1078  
AN1445  
AN1504  
SCI COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ST7 AND PC  
SPI COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ST7 AND EEPROM  
ST7 SOFTWARE SPI MASTER COMMUNICATION  
SCI SOFTWARE COMMUNICATION WITH A PC USING ST72251 16-BIT TIMER  
REAL TIME CLOCK WITH ST7 TIMER OUTPUT COMPARE  
DRIVING A BUZZER THROUGH ST7 TIMER PWM FUNCTION  
DRIVING AN ANALOG KEYBOARD WITH THE ST7 ADC  
ST7 KEYPAD DECODING TECHNIQUES, IMPLEMENTING WAKE-UP ON KEYSTROKE  
USING ST7 PWM SIGNAL TO GENERATE ANALOG OUTPUT (SINUSOÏD)  
MULTIPLE INTERRUPT SOURCES MANAGEMENT FOR ST7 MCUS  
UART EMULATION SOFTWARE  
MANAGING RECEPTION ERRORS WITH THE ST7 SCI PERIPHERALS  
ST7 SOFTWARE LCD DRIVER  
PWM DUTY CYCLE SWITCH IMPLEMENTING TRUE 0% & 100% DUTY CYCLE  
EMULATED 16 BIT SLAVE SPI  
STARTING A PWM SIGNAL DIRECTLY AT HIGH LEVEL USING THE ST7 16-BIT TIMER  
GENERAL PURPOSE  
AN1476  
AN1709  
AN1752  
LOW COST POWER SUPPLY FOR HOME APPLIANCES  
EMC DESIGN FOR ST MICROCONTROLLERS  
ST72324 QUICK REFERENCE NOTE  
PRODUCT EVALUATION  
AN 910  
AN 990  
AN1150  
AN1151  
AN1278  
PERFORMANCE BENCHMARKING  
ST7 BENEFITS VERSUS INDUSTRY STANDARD  
BENCHMARK ST72 VS PC16  
PERFORMANCE COMPARISON BETWEEN ST72254 & PC16F876  
LIN (LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK) SOLUTIONS  
PRODUCT MIGRATION  
AN1131  
MIGRATING APPLICATIONS FROM ST72511/311/214/124 TO ST72521/321/324  
PRODUCT OPTIMIZATION  
AN 982  
AN1014  
AN1015  
AN1070  
AN1181  
AN1502  
USING ST7 WITH CERAMIC RESONATOR  
HOW TO MINIMIZE THE ST7 POWER CONSUMPTION  
SOFTWARE TECHNIQUES FOR IMPROVING MICROCONTROLLER EMC PERFORMANCE  
ST7 CHECKSUM SELF-CHECKING CAPABILITY  
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE MEASUREMENT  
EMULATED DATA EEPROM WITH ST7 HDFLASH MEMORY  
ACCURATE TIMEBASE FOR LOW-COST ST7 APPLICATIONS WITH INTERNAL RC OSCILLA-  
TOR  
AN1530  
AN1636  
UNDERSTANDING AND MINIMIZING ADC CONVERSION ERRORS  
PROGRAMMING AND TOOLS  
AN 978  
ST7 VISUAL DEVELOP SOFTWARE KEY DEBUGGING FEATURES  
134/140  
1
ST72323  
Table 27. ST7 Application Notes  
IDENTIFICATION DESCRIPTION  
AN 983  
AN 985  
AN 986  
AN 987  
AN 988  
AN 989  
AN1039  
AN1064  
AN1106  
AN1446  
AN1478  
AN1575  
AN1576  
AN1635  
AN1754  
AN1796  
KEY FEATURES OF THE COSMIC ST7 C-COMPILER PACKAGE  
EXECUTING CODE IN ST7 RAM  
USING THE INDIRECT ADDRESSING MODE WITH ST7  
ST7 SERIAL TEST CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING  
STARTING WITH ST7 ASSEMBLY TOOL CHAIN  
GETTING STARTED WITH THE ST7 HIWARE C TOOLCHAIN  
ST7 MATH UTILITY ROUTINES  
WRITING OPTIMIZED HIWARE C LANGUAGE FOR ST7  
TRANSLATING ASSEMBLY CODE FROM HC05 TO ST7  
USING THE ST72521 EMULATOR TO DEBUG A ST72324 TARGET APPLICATION  
PORTING AN ST7 PANTA PROJECT TO CODEWARRIOR IDE  
ON-BOARD PROGRAMMING METHODS FOR XFLASH AND HDFLASH ST7 MCUS  
IN-APPLICATION PROGRAMMING (IAP) DRIVERS FOR ST7 HDFLASH OR XFLASH MCUS  
ST7 CUSTOMER ROM CODE RELEASE INFORMATION  
DATA LOGGING PROGRAM FOR TESTING ST7 APPLICATIONS VIA ICC  
FIELD UPDATES FOR FLASH BASED ST7 APPLICATIONS USING A PC COMM PORT  
SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION  
AN1711 SOFTWARE TECHNIQUES FOR COMPENSATING ST7 ADC ERRORS  
135/140  
1
ST72323  
14 KNOWN LIMITATIONS  
14.1 Unexpected Reset Fetch  
– The interrupt flag is cleared in any part of the  
code while this interrupt is disabled  
If an interrupt request occurs while a "POP CC" in-  
struction is executed, the interrupt controller does  
not recognise the source of the interrupt and, by  
default, passes the RESET vector address to the  
CPU.  
If these conditions are not met, the symptom can  
be avoided by implementing the following se-  
quence:  
PUSH CC  
SIM  
Workaround  
To solve this issue, a "POP CC" instruction must  
always be preceded by a "SIM" instruction.  
reset interrupt flag  
POP CC  
14.2 Clearing active interrupts outside  
interrupt routine  
14.3 External interrupt missed  
To avoid any risk if generating a parasitic interrupt,  
the edge detector is automatically disabled for one  
clock cycle during an access to either DDR and  
OR. Any input signal edge during this period will  
not be detected and will not generate an interrupt.  
When an active interrupt request occurs at the  
same time as the related flag is being cleared, an  
unwanted reset may occur.  
Note: clearing the related interrupt mask will not  
generate an unwanted reset  
This case can typically occur if the application re-  
freshes the port configuration registers at intervals  
during runtime.  
Concurrent interrupt context  
The symptom does not occur when the interrupts  
are handled normally, i.e.  
Workaround  
The workaround is based on software checking  
the level on the interrupt pin before and after writ-  
ing to the PxOR or PxDDR registers. If there is a  
level change (depending on the sensitivity pro-  
grammed for this pin) the interrupt routine is in-  
voked using the call instruction with three extra  
PUSH instructions before executing the interrupt  
routine (this is to make the call compatible with the  
IRET instruction at the end of the interrupt service  
routine).  
when:  
– The interrupt flag is cleared within its own inter-  
rupt routine  
– The interrupt flag is cleared within any interrupt  
routine  
– The interrupt flag is cleared in any part of the  
code while this interrupt is disabled  
If these conditions are not met, the symptom can  
be avoided by implementing the following se-  
quence:  
But detection of the level change does not make  
sure that edge occurs during the critical 1 cycle du-  
ration and the interrupt has been missed. This may  
lead to occurrence of same interrupt twice (one  
hardware and another with software call).  
Perform SIM and RIM operation before and after  
resetting an active interrupt request.  
Example:  
SIM  
To avoid this, a semaphore is set to '1' before  
checking the level change. The semaphore is  
changed to level '0' inside the interrupt routine.  
When a level change is detected, the semaphore  
status is checked and if it is '1' this means that the  
last interrupt has been missed. In this case, the in-  
terrupt routine is invoked with the call instruction.  
reset interrupt flag  
RIM  
Nested interrupt context:  
The symptom does not occur when the interrupts  
are handled normally, i.e.  
when:  
There is another possible case i.e. if writing to  
PxOR or PxDDR is done with global interrupts dis-  
abled (interrupt mask bit set). In this case, the  
semaphore is changed to '1' when the level  
change is detected. Detecting a missed interrupt is  
done after the global interrupts are enabled (inter-  
– The interrupt flag is cleared within its own inter-  
rupt routine  
– The interrupt flag is cleared within any interrupt  
routine with higher or identical priority level  
136/140  
1
ST72323  
rupt mask bit reset) and by checking the status of  
the semaphore. If it is '1' this means that the last  
interrupt was missed and the interrupt routine is in-  
voked with the call instruction.  
IRET  
Case 2: Writing to PxOR or PxDDR with Global In-  
terrupts Disabled:  
SIM  
; set the interrupt mask  
To implement the workaround, the following soft-  
ware sequence is to be followed for writing into the  
PxOR/PxDDR registers. The example is for for  
Port PF1 with falling edge interrupt sensitivity. The  
software sequence is given for both cases (global  
interrupt disabled/enabled).  
LD A,PFDR  
AND A,#$02  
LD X,A  
; store the level before writing to  
PxOR/PxDDR  
LD A,#$90  
Case 1: Writing to PxOR or PxDDR with Global In-  
terrupts Enabled:  
LD PFDDR,A; Write into PFDDR  
LD A,#$ff  
LD A,#01  
LD PFOR,A  
LD A,PFDR  
AND A,#$02  
; Write to PFOR  
LD sema,A  
LD A,PFDR  
AND A,#02  
; set the semaphore to '1'  
LD Y,A  
PxDDR  
; store the level after writing to PxOR/  
; check for falling edge  
LD X,A  
; store the level before writing to  
PxOR/PxDDR  
LD A,X  
LD A,#$90  
cp A,#$02  
jrne OUT  
TNZ Y  
LD PFDDR,A ; Write to PFDDR  
LD A,#$ff  
LD PFOR,A ; Write to PFOR  
LD A,PFDR  
jrne OUT  
LD A,#$01  
AND A,#02  
LD sema,A ; set the semaphore to '1' if edge is  
detected  
LD Y,A  
PxOR/PxDDR  
; store the level after writing to  
RIM  
; reset the interrupt mask  
LD A,X  
; check for falling edge  
LD A,sema ; check the semaphore status  
cp A,#02  
jrne OUT  
TNZ Y  
CP A,#$01  
jrne OUT  
call call_routine; call the interrupt routine  
RIM  
jrne OUT  
LD A,sema  
edge is detected  
; check the semaphore status if  
OUT:  
RIM  
CP A,#01  
JP while_loop  
.call_routine ; entry to call_routine  
PUSH A  
jrne OUT  
call call_routine; call the interrupt routine  
OUT:LD A,#00  
PUSH X  
LD sema,A  
PUSH CC  
.call_routine ; entry to call_routine  
.ext1_rt  
; entry to interrupt routine  
PUSH A  
PUSH X  
PUSH CC  
LD A,#$00  
LD sema,A  
IRET  
.ext1_rt  
; entry to interrupt routine  
14.4 16-bit Timer PWM Mode  
LD A,#00  
LD sema,A  
In PWM mode, the first PWM pulse is missed after  
writing the value FFFCh in the OC1R register  
137/140  
1
ST72323  
(OC1HR, OC1LR). It leads to either full or no PWM  
during a period, depending on the OLVL1 and  
OLVL2 settings.  
quency from the ST72323L and ST72323 ROM  
devices.  
14.5  
ST72F324B  
COMPATIBLE  
FLASH  
DEVICES  
14.5.1 Internal RC Operation  
In ST72F324J and ST72F324K devices, the inter-  
nal RC oscillator is centered on a different fre-  
138/140  
ST72323  
15 REVISION HISTORY  
Table 28. Revision History  
Date  
Revision  
Description of Changes  
20-Apr-2005  
1
Initial release  
139/140  
ST72323  
Please Read Carefully:  
Information in this document is provided solely in connection with ST products. STMicroelectronics NV and its subsidiaries (“ST”) reserve the  
right to make changes, corrections, modifications or improvements, to this document, and the products and services described herein at any  
time, without notice.  
All ST products are sold pursuant to ST’s terms and conditions of sale.  
Purchasers are solely responsible for the choice, selection and use of the ST products and services described herein, and ST assumes no  
liability whatsoever relating to the choice, selection or use of the ST products and services described herein.  
No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property rights is granted under this document. If any part of this  
document refers to any third party products or services it shall not be deemed a license grant by ST for the use of such third party products  
or services, or any intellectual property contained therein or considered as a warranty covering the use in any manner whatsoever of such  
third party products or services or any intellectual property contained therein.  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SET FORTH IN ST’S TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE ST DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE USE AND/OR SALE OF ST PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE (AND THEIR EQUIVALENTS UNDER THE LAWS  
OF ANY JURISDICTION), OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT, COPYRIGHT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT.  
UNLESS EXPRESSLY APPROVED IN WRITING BY AN AUTHORIZE REPRESENTATIVE OF ST, ST PRODUCTS ARE NOT DESIGNED,  
AUTHORIZED OR WARRANTED FOR USE IN MILITARY, AIR CRAFT, SPACE, LIFE SAVING, OR LIFE SUSTAINING APPLICATIONS,  
NOR IN PRODUCTS OR SYSTEMS, WHERE FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY, DEATH, OR  
SEVERE PROPERTY OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE.  
Resale of ST products with provisions different from the statements and/or technical features set forth in this document shall immediately void  
any warranty granted by ST for the ST product or service described herein and shall not create or extend in any manner whatsoever, any  
liability of ST.  
ST and the ST logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of ST in various countries.  
Information in this document supersedes and replaces all information previously supplied.  
The ST logo is a registered trademark of STMicroelectronics. All other names are the property of their respective owners.  
© 2006 STMicroelectronics - All rights reserved  
STMicroelectronics group of companies  
Australia - Belgium - Brazil - Canada - China - Czech Republic - Finland - France - Germany - Hong Kong - India - Israel - Italy - Japan -  
Malaysia - Malta - Morocco - Singapore - Spain - Sweden - Switzerland - United Kingdom - United States of America  
www.st.com  
140/140  

相关型号:

ST72324BK2TA/XXXE

8-BIT, MROM, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP32, 7 X 7 MM, ROHS COMPLIANT, LQFP-32

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
STMICROELECTR

ST72324BK2TA/XXXRS

8-BIT, MROM, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP32, 7 X 7 MM, ROHS COMPLIANT, LQFP-32

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
STMICROELECTR

ST72324BK2TB/XXXE

8-BIT, MROM, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP32, 7 X 7 MM, ROHS COMPLIANT, LQFP-32

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
STMICROELECTR

ST72324BK2TC/XXX

8-BIT, MROM, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP32, 7 X 7 MM, PLASTIC, TQFP-32

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
STMICROELECTR

ST72324BK2TC/XXXE

8-BIT, MROM, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP32, 7 X 7 MM, ROHS COMPLIANT, LQFP-32

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
STMICROELECTR

ST72324BK4

8-bit MCU, 3.8 to 5.5 V operating range with 8 to 32 Kbyte Flash/ROM, 10-bit ADC, 4 timers, SPI, SCI

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
STMICROELECTR

ST72324BK4B3

MICROCONTROLLER

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
STMICROELECTR

ST72324BK4B5/XXX

8-BIT, MROM, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PDIP32, 0.400 INCH, SHRINK, PLASTIC, DIP-32

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
STMICROELECTR

ST72324BK4B6/XXX

8-BIT, MROM, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PDIP32, 0.400 INCH, SHRINK, PLASTIC, DIP-32

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
STMICROELECTR

ST72324BK4B7

MICROCONTROLLER

Warning: Undefined variable $rtag in /www/wwwroot/website_ic37/www.icpdf.com/pdf/pdf/index.php on line 211
-
STMICROELECTR